Toshiba Strata AirLink DK280 Installation Manual Download Page 11

Page: 11 / 878

IMPORTANT!

System Configuration can be complex and time consuming. For best results:

Use the software program

to provide

fast, automated configuration.

This

runs on an

compatible

486

PC,

or higher, with a hard drive.

If the above software is not available,

use all the Worksheets in Chapter I-Configuration.

Important Installation

Notes:

Place the RCTU jumper

into battery position; otherwise, all programmed data will

be lost upon power down. Battery jumper plugs are on: RCTUA, RCTUB,
RCTUC, and

PCBs.

Install RCCS PCBs on RCTU PCBs as required.

Install PDKU, PEKU, or RSlU in slot 11.

- and/or -

If an RSlU is installed in slot 11, install a PDKU or PEKU in slot

Starting with the lowest empty slot

install all station, attendant console, loop

start, ground start, and

PCBs from lower to higher numbered slots (left to

right). Do not leave empty slots except when installing RDTU PCBs when required per

Tables 1-9 and

of Chapter 1-Configuration.

After all station, attendant console, and

start line, and

PCBs are

installed, install all DID and tie line PCBs starting from the first numbered empty slot to the
highest needed

(in left to right order). Do not leave empty slots except when installing

RDTU PCBs per Tables 11 -1, 11

-2,

and 11 -3 of Chapter 11

Install PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, or RSSU in any convenient vacant slot.

Check power factors for each cabinet and for the entire system as explained

Chapter 1 -Configuration.

needed, run Program 91-9

twice

to initialize program data. Do this

you have just

completed Step 1 above. Run Program

and turn system power OFF (five seconds) and

then

to activate and identify to Program

03 any subassembly PCBs installed.

Perform memory test as in Program

00, Part

10. Program customer database manually or upload customer database using a

11. Backup the customer database using a

personal computer.

January

1996

Summary of Contents for Strata AirLink DK280

Page 1: ... Example 1 13 Worksheet 1 Summary Example 1 15 System PCB Slot Requirements Example 1 16 Worksheet 2 System PCB Assignment Guide Example 1 23 Worksheet 3 ConfigurationGuide Example 1 28 Worksheet 4 System Power FactorCheck Example 1 32 System PCB Slot Requirements 1 37 Worksheet 2 System PCB Assignment Guide 1 44 Worksheet 3 ConfigurationGuide 1 49 Worksheet 4 System Power Factor Check 1 53 Worksh...

Page 2: ...ion 3 28 3 7 1 Floor or Wall Mounted Systems with One or Two Cabinets 3 28 3 7 2 3 7 3 Reserve Power Installation 3 29 3 8 1 3 8 2 3 8 3 Wall Mounted Systems with Three or More Cabinets 3 29 Floor MountedSystems with Three or More Cabinets 3 29 Floor or Wall Mounted Systems with One or Two Cabinets 3 30 Wall Mounted Systemswith Three or More Cabinets 3 30 Floor MountedSystems with Three or More Ca...

Page 3: ...it PCOU Versions 1 2 4 36 4 10 1 PCOU Hardware Options 4 36 4 10 2 PCOU InstallationProcedures 4 36 4 10 3 PCOU Wiring 4 36 4 10 4 PCOU ProgrammingOverview 4 36 Loop GroundStart CO Line InterfaceUnit RGLU 4 38 4 1 1 1 RGLU Hardware Option 4 38 4 11 2 RGLU InstallationProcedures 4 38 4 11 3 RGLU Wiring 4 38 4 1 1 4 RGLU ProgrammingOverview 4 38 E M Tie Line Unit PEMU REMU 4 40 4 12 1 PEMU REMU Hard...

Page 4: ...eous Voice and Data Upgrade RPCI DI PDIU D12and PDIU DI 5 4 5 3 2 IntegratedRPCl Data Interface Unit Programming Overview 5 6 5 3 3 Telephone Speaker Off hook Call Announce Upgrade DVSU 5 6 5 3 4 Loud Ringing BelVHeadset Upgrade HHEU 5 6 5 3 5 Carbon HeadseVHandsetStraps 5 9 5 3 6 Beep Strap 5 9 5 3 7 Microphone Speaker SensitivityAdjustment Speakerphones Only 5 10 5 3 8 Busy Overrideand Camp on R...

Page 5: ...ardware Requirements 6 22 6 5 2 External Page Option Installation 6 22 Two CO Line ExternalAmplified Conference 6 25 6 6 1 Amplifier Requirements 6 28 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Printer CallAccounting Device Options 6 28 6 7 1 SMDR Hardware Requirements 6 32 6 7 2 SMDR Printer Call Accounting Device Installation 6 33 Voice Mail Options 6 33 6 8 1 System Hardware Requirements 6 33 6 8 2 ...

Page 6: ... 1 4 Cabinet Front Side and Top Cover Removal and Installation 3 3 DK280 Power Supply RPSU280 Installation 3 4 Cabinet Mounting Surface Diagram Directly on Wall 3 7 Cabinet Mounting Surface Diagram with Plywood Backboard 3 8 Minimum Clearance Requirements 2 2 DK280 Power Supply RPSU280 Removal 3 5 Cabinet Cover Removal and Installation 3 9 Cabinet Back Cover Mounting 3 10 Back Cover Mounting Holes...

Page 7: ...Indicators and InterfaceConnectors 4 27 PESU PCB Option Location and Identification 4 29 RCOU Controls Indicators and InterfaceConnectors 4 32 RCOS Controls Indicators and Interface Connectors 4 34 PCOU Controls Indicators and InterfaceConnectors 4 37 RGLU Controls Indicators and InterfaceConnectors 4 39 REMU Controls Indicators and InterfaceConnectors 4 41 PEMUI Controls Indicators and InterfaceC...

Page 8: ...PIOU PIOUS PEPU 6 23 PlOU Zone Page BGM Night Ring Separate Amplifiers 6 24 ExternalAmplified Two CO Line Call FunctionalWiring Diagram 6 27 SMDR Printout Examples for DK280 Release 1 and 2 6 29 SMDR Printout Examples for DK280 Release 3 6 31 PIOU PIOUS RSIU RSIS SMDR Port Program97 Data Dump Example 6 32 HESB ElectronicTelephonewith Loud Ringing BellWiring 6 34 HESB ElectronicTelephone with Loud ...

Page 9: ...nd SMDR Wiring 7 23 PIOUS Page Relay Alarm Connections 7 24 PIOUS SMDRRTY Options and Wiring 7 25 MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones DKTs and DDSS Console to PDKU 7 26 MDF Wiring for DigitalTelephones with PDIU DI and PDIU DSto PDKU 7 27 PDKU Station MDFCross Connect Record 7 28 MDF Wiring PEKU Amplified Two CO Line Conference 7 29 MDF Wiring DDCB DoorPhoneILockto PDKU 7 30 Built in Auto Attendant ...

Page 10: ...and InterfaceConnectors for Release 3 4 14 RCTUBA Controls Indicators and InterfaceConnectors Release3 4 15 RCTUBB Controls Indicators and InterfaceConnectors for Release3 4 16 RCTUC3 Controls Indicators and InterfaceConnectors 4 17 RCTUD3 Controls Indicators and Interface Connectors for Release3 4 18 PEKU Controls Indicators and InterfaceConnectors 4 21 RSTU and PSTU Controls Indicators and Inter...

Page 11: ... empty slots except when installing RDTU PCBs when required per Tables 1 9 and 1 10 of Chapter 1 Configuration After all station attendant console and ground loop start line and RCIU RCIS PCBs are installed install all DID and tie line PCBs starting from the first numbered empty slot to the highest needed in left to right order Do not leave empty slots except when installing RDTU PCBs per Tables 1...

Page 12: ...I ...

Page 13: ...with an RCTUC D RCTUB or RCTUBNBB common control unit the base cabinet can support as many as 40 stations and eight lines RCTU processors and the RSlU option PCBs must be installedin dedicated slots of the base cabinet As many as five expansion cabinets DKSUE280 or DKSUE424 can be added to the base cabinet to add more lines and stations to the system With DK280 software DKSUE280 and DKSUE424 are i...

Page 14: ...idually be assigned for Ground Start or Loop Start CO line operation H REMU Four E M tie lines Type I or II signaling H PEMU Four analog E M tie lines Type I signaling only H RDDU Four analog Direct Inward Dialing DID line circuits H RDTU T1 interface PCB can have 8 16 or 24 channels for DID tie Ground Start CO or Loop Start CO line operation Console PCBs see Table 1 2 W RATU Provides interface fo...

Page 15: ...nect to circuit 8 on a PDKU PCB see Table 1 6 for configurationconsiderations Add On Module ADM For medium traffic smaller systems where an attendant must answer and transfer incoming calls The ADM connects to any 2000 series digital telephone The ADM shares the associatedtelephonescircuit so it does not require a designated PCB or circuit port see Table 1 5 1 7 Door Phones MDFBs Up to 12 door pho...

Page 16: ...ABINETS RCTUCID I CO LINES I STATIONS I I CO LINES I STATIONS I 5 CABINETS RCTUC D 6 CABINETS RCTUCID I COLINES I STATIONS I I COLINES I S T A T I I COLINES I STAT DK0130 Figure 1 1 Strata DK280 Cabinet ConfigurationTables for 8 Port CO Line PCBs Without Caller ID 1 4 January1996 ...

Page 17: ... Tenants DistributedHunt Groups6 DistributedHunt Stations per Group6 DistributedHunt Calls in Queue per Group6 DK0536 GD C2 Notes 1 All CO Line capacities assume a PIOU PIOUS PEPU RSSU or RSlU is installed for RCTUBNBB or RCTUC D but not Caller ID RCIU RCIS PCBs 2 Limits apply to analog DID and tie lines not T1 DID tie lines 3 T1 lines can be loop start ground start tie or DID maximum24 lines per ...

Page 18: ...Station Classes LCR Route DefinitionTables Toll Restriction AC OC Table Toll RestrictionClasses LCR AC AC OC ExceptionTables LCR Modify Digit Tables 8 8 1 6 8 8 16 3 3 3 4 4 8 4 4 6 6 6 12 8 8 16 4 4 8 IACD Music Interface Ports 1 perGroup I 0 1 8 I 16 I ACD MIS ACD Groups 1 ACD Announce Interface Ports 3 per Group _ 0 24 48 DK0132 No Yes Yes 0 8 16 1 6 January 1996 ...

Page 19: ...swith Caller ID Requires RCOU RCOS RGLU or PCOU With RCIS 8 circuits RJ14C Modular Without RCOS Subassembly With RCOS 0 Loop Start Lines I 8 Loop Start Line Circuits 4 Line Circuits Loop Start or Ground Start Lines RGLU I RJ14C Modular 0 Loop or GroundStart Lines 4 CO Line Circuits 4 Direct Inward DialingCircuits Loop Start Lines DIDLines Loop Start Lines Ground Start Lines Tie Lines Wink or Immed...

Page 20: ...s TTY output o r t X IMDU 1 I M k 1 I X I X I p j X RSIUIRSIS RSSU s X I I DK0535tGD 2 Notes 1 PIOU PIOUS and RSSU each provide one TTYport which can be flexiblyprogrammed for the features marked with X RSIU RSIS canprovide up to four flexible TTY SMDRports 2 SMDR output will functionsimultaneously on the same PloU Or PIOUS with one of the following 28OAdmin PC remote modem MIS for ACD or SMDl fea...

Page 21: ...er ID to the system RClS RClU 1 maximum per RClU RKYS 1 2 3 or 4 RCTUA RCTUBA BB or RCTUC D RCUTA supports RKYSl AA only 1 maximum per RCTU Provides system with the following feature upgrades RKYSl for built inAuto Attendant AA RKYS2for AA feature plus Automatic Call Distribution ACD RKYS3 for AA and ACD features plus Management Information System MIS application for ACD Architecture and all RKYS3...

Page 22: ...taltelephones DKT2000DigitalTelephones HHEU 1 per telephone Provides interfacefor electronictelephone to receive Off hook Call Announce Provides interface for headset and Loud Ringing Bell to telephone Provides Data Calling interface 1 per telephone 1 per telephone 1 per telephone ProvidesTwo Modes of Operation PDIU D12 PDIU DI RPCI DI DADM 2000 series Digital i Telephones 1or 2 per telephone i 1 ...

Page 23: ...B RCTUBNBB and RCTUC D 9 per system RCTUA Door monitor with two way talk pathto Doorbellthat rings designated digital and Microphone for talkback amplifier with system telephones electronic telephones HESB DK0137 Votes 1 DSS consoles can be flexibly assigned to designatedelectronicand digital telephone stations Up to 8 DSS consoles may be assigned to a designated electronicor digital telephone sta...

Page 24: ... RBTC2A 1 5M cables are providedwith the RBDBdistributionbox to connect up to six DK280 power suppliesto the Battery DistributionBox RFlF RCCB RPSB1 See RPSBTable below RPSB2 SeeRPSBTable below Floor Mount Fixture Kit Conduit Connection Box Three outlet AC Power Strip Three outletAC Power Strip Heavy Cord Providestwo metal stands for mountingthree or more KSU cabinets on floor Three pairs of wall ...

Page 25: ...s can be installed in a cabinet Each telephone and printed circuit board has a negative PF and the RPSU280 power supply has a positive PF 65 The sum of the PFs of telephones and PCBs connected to a signal cabinet must not exceed 65 and the sum of the calculated cabinet PFs must not exceed the values providedin Worksheet 4 Chart 3 1 I 1 Configuration Worksheet Example The following example demonstr...

Page 26: ...need upgradefor Caller ID I 1 RSSU PCB SMDR Fill out worksheets as follows to configure the system see example worksheets 1 2 3 4 5 Record all new and existing telephones and other devices on Worksheet 1 A1 A4 61 B6 and C1 C3 Determine the quantity of cabinet slots and PCBs needed using Worksheet 1 C4 CI0 Use Worksheet 2 to configure system PCBs slots and cabinets Use Worksheet 3 to record miscell...

Page 27: ...hone Alternate BGM and External Amplified conference needs DetermineDigital Port Requirements DetermineStandard Port Requirements Determine Electronic Port Requirements Determine Station PCB Slot Requirements PDKU PCB Slot RSTU or PSTU PCB Slots RDSU RSTU PCB Slots PEKU PCB Slots PESU PCB Slots Total Station PCB Slots Determine CO Line PCB Slot Requirements RCOU RCOS PCB Slots RGLU PCB Slots RCIU ...

Page 28: ...er to HDSS in Table 1 6 I B1 HDSS 2 1 existing 82 Door phone lock units required referto HDCB in Table 1 6 B2 HDCBs 83 Electronic telephones required refer to PEKU and PESU in Table 1 2 b Note Add in all other electronic telephonesif upgrading an existing Strata DK system using 2000 6000 6005 series electronic telephones I B3 Total electronic telephones 16 1 existing 84 Separate BGM source connect...

Page 29: ...Auto Attendant Digital Announcement Devices 2 F Total Other Devices Digital telephone equipped with PDIU D12or ADM only require 1digital port 1 Door Phone Control Box DDCB supports three Door Phones MDFBs I 1 portperDevice C2 Determine Standard Port Requirements from 85 A Total Electronic Telephones B Total Electronic DSS Consoles C Total Electronic Door Phone Control Boxes D Total E Alternate BGM...

Page 30: ...TWPSTU section in Chapter 4 Printed Circuit Boards for more details The RSTUprovides eight standard telephoneports circuits Circuit2 only can connect to a separate Background Music BGM source The RSTU can be equipped withan R48S to extend the loop length of the RSTU from 600 ohms to 1200ohms see Table 1 4 RSTU2 is required to operate message waiting lamps on a standard telephone Total RSTS PCBs I ...

Page 31: ...eeded requirements eight exist already 76 from Company A s I Loop Start Lines B A Total RCOU RCOS PCB Slots 8 8 s 2 PCOU Loop Start Lines B RGLU RCOU or PCOU PCB Slots C5 1 Total Loop Start Llne slots A 6 4 4 existing I 2 T I RGLUcan provide loop or ground start lines General Notes RCOU provides four loop start CO lines in its basic configuration An RCOS can be attached to the RCOU to add four mor...

Page 32: ... or II signaling Wink or ImmediateStart 2 or 4 wire transmission The PEMU1 can also be used The PEMU only provides TypeI signaling 2 or 4 wire transmission and ImmediateStart See Table 1 1 for REMU PEMU maximum quantities Each REMU or PEMU reduces system station port line and capacity by four ports and four lines DetermineAnalog DID Line PCB Slot Requirements Total DID lines with or without ANVDNI...

Page 33: ...reduces the system stationport capacity by one port Total CO LINE PCB Slots C5 RCOU RCOS I from C5 1 PCOU 2 from C5 1 RGLU from C5 1 5 2 RClU RClS 2 from C5 3 REMU I from C5 4 RDDU from C5 5 RDTU 2 pea14 from C5 6 C5T Total CO line PCB Slots m l m l C6 Attendant Console Slots C6T RATU PCB Slot 1 1 1 one required for 1 4 Attendant Console Maximum C7 PlOU PIOUS RSlU RSSU Option Slot see Table 1 3 A ...

Page 34: ...n PCB PEPU provide 600 ohm interface or 3 watt page output Total PEPU PCBs Slots I 0 1 C9 TotalSystemSlots C4T 10 C5T 10 C6T 1 C7T 2 C8T 0 C9T Total Slots 2 3 23 C9T 3 f 4 round up C10 Total Cabinets 6 6 C11 Go to Worksheet 2 and fill in Worksheet 2 Chart 1 DKOl53 1 22 January1996 ...

Page 35: ...d left empty Remember to install subassembly PCBs onto plug in PCBs before inserting plug in PCBs into cabinet slots PDKU or PEKU in slot 11 Starting with Slot 12 install all station ground and loop start lines and option PCBs3from left to right from lowest to highest numbered slots without leaving any empty slots4 They may be intermixed in cabinets and do not have to be placed in consecutive orde...

Page 36: ...Tie and DID line PCBs include REMU RDDU PEMU and RDTU tie DID line PCBs These PCBs use station ports and CO line ports in DK280 software so they should not be installed in lower numbered slots than station PCBs whenever practical This will prevent station port number shifting which could cause problems with BLF station directory number or Primary Directory Number PDN sequences If installing an RDT...

Page 37: ...t PDKU2 slots suppot OCA RPCI DI or PDIU DI DS with PDKU1 or PDKU2 installed slots do not support OCA RPCI DI or PDIU DVDS with PDKUl but do support OCA slots do not support PDKU1 PCBs slots support PDKU2 but do not support OCA slots do not support OCA RPCI DI or PDIU DI DS with PDKUl or PDKU2 PDKUl does not support continuous DTMF tones on 2000 seriesdigital telephones Allslots support RPCI DI if...

Page 38: ...binet I25 I No slot must be vacant Slots that must remain vacant Allowed if a 24 channel RDTU is installed RDTU inthe allowed slot shown to Slot Number the left of this column 13 14 Table 1 10 Example 1 24 Channel RDTU Slot Configuration 2 Expansion Unit 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 Base Unit 3 Expansion Unit 31 I32 33 I34 35 4 Expansion Unit 41 I42 43 144 45 5 ExpansionUnit 51 I52 53 1 5 4 s I 6 Expansion...

Page 39: ... 3 5 Option Note CABINET 3 PCB Type Port Nos Line Nos 080 083 025 032 033 036 037 040 072 075 Option Note A s S42 s43 s44 s45 CABINET 4 S46 I S47 I S48 I PCB Type Port Nos 084 095 041 056 Line Nos Option Note 16 D D 4 7 i e S52 s53 s54 s55 CABINET 5 S51 PCB Type Port Nos Line Nos Option Note CABINET 6 S61 Port Nos Option Note Vacant means the slot cannot be used because its time slots are used by ...

Page 40: ...DTMF receiver circuits may be required or multiple RRCS for large systems General Note Only one RRCS can be used per system with RCTUA or RCTUB RCTUC D and RCTUBNRCTUBB support 2 RRCS PCBs total24 DTMF receivers maximum RKYS 1 2 3 o r 4 for ACD MIS plus built in Auto Attendant If auto attendant built in ACD ACDIMIS or System Open Architecture OA port is required one RKYS option key is requiredsee ...

Page 41: ... headsets RSlS PCB I PPTC 25 pin DK0163 ppTC 9 9 pin K HESB AmplifierISpeaker 1 One HESB is required for each digital and electronic telephone providingthe Loud Ringing Bell option 2 One HESB is optionalto providesingle zoneexternal page connected to either a PIOU PIOUS or PEPU 3 One HESB is optionalto provide a talkback amplifier page speaker connected to a PIOU PIOUS or customer suppliedamplifie...

Page 42: ...t and receive voice and data calls and or interfacewith an Application Program Interface API personal computer ET Actual for 2000 series DKTS RBDB Battery Box Required when connecting reserve power batteries to three or more cabinets wall or floor mount see Chapter 3 Cabinet Installation Figure 3 23 3 26 Q RBDB refer to Table 1 7 RBDB I R RCCB refer to Table 1 7 9 RCCB conduit box is required for ...

Page 43: ...hiba VP or Stratagy documentationfor detailed informationabout the VM machines and to C2 of Worksheet 2 in this chapter for DK280 VM port requirements V Personal Computersfor Attendant Consoles with RAT1and RATHC 280Admin 280Backup SMlS for ACD System Open Architecture 6 DKO167 January1996 1 31 ...

Page 44: ... with Charts 2 3 and 4 that follow to check that the system configurationdoes not exceed the specified power factor limits 3 Power Factor Examplesfor two other example system configurations Total PF 1 Cabinet System Configuration 40 Digitaltelephones 4 E M tie lines 24 PDIU D12 296 6 6 Cabinets System Configuration 220 Digitaltelephones 16 Loopstart lines 4 Attendantconsoles 14 E Mtie lines 104 PD...

Page 45: ...imitation by National ElectricCode Table 1 13 Example Printed Circuit Board PCB Power Factors PF PCB Type I PF PCB Type I PF RCTUA I 1 0 RDSU 24VI I 0 3 RCTUB I 1 0 PSTU RSTU 24V I 0 5 RCTUC D I 1 9 RCOU 4 CO I 2 0 RCTUBNBB I 1 9 RCOU RCOS 8 CO I 4 0 RRCS 4 I 0 3 REMU PEMU I 7 5 RRCS 8 I 0 5 RRCS 12 PCOU1 2 RDTU 0 5 RDSU R48S 48VI RSTU R48S 48V I 1 0 PDKU1 2 I 0 3 PEPU I 6 5 PEKU I 0 7 PlOU I 6 5 ...

Page 46: ...I DI Stand aloneData InterfaceUnit Standard Telephone 48V Standard Telephone 24V Attendant Console Power Failure Unit DPFT HHEU BASE CABINET CAB 1 Quantity X Power pF Factor Total 30 x 1 0 30 x 2 0 X 2 5 x 2 0 x 2 0 x 1 0 x 1 2 X 0 8 X 0 4 ___ X 0 5 __ X 0 5 X 0 8 x 1 0 X 0 5 X 4 0 X 3 0 1 1 2 4 x 0 1 A 04 Total Power Factor 3 3 EXP CABINET CAB 4 x 1 0 x 2 0 X 2 5 x 2 0 x 2 0 x 1 0 x 1 2 X 0 8 X 0...

Page 47: ... 81 1 101 9 170 4 Worksheet 4 System Power Factor Check continued Example I CHART 3 CABINET POWER FACTOR PCB TELEPHONE DEVICE Calculate the total Power Factor PF of each cabinet must be less than 65 See Worksheet 2 Chart 1for PCB quantity and type and Worksheet A C for power factors CABINET 2 CABINET 1 CABINET 3 Slot 8 Telephone Device PF See Chart 1 Total Cabinet PF I 20 4 CABINET 4 CABINET 5 CAB...

Page 48: ...ate BGM and ExternalAmplified conference needs DetermineDigital Port Requirements DetermineStandard Port Requirements Determine Electronic Port Requirements DetermineStation PCB Slot Requirements PDKU PCB Slot RSTU or PSTU PCB Slots RDSU RSTU PCB Slots PEKU PCB Slots PESU PCB Slots Total Station PCB Slots DetermineCO Line PCB Slot Requirements RCOU RCOS PCB Slots RGLU PCB Slots RCIU RCIS PCB Slots...

Page 49: ...d referto HDSS in Table 1 6 82 Door phone lock units required referto HDCB in Table 1 6 B3 Electronictelephones required referto PEKU and PESU in Table 1 2 Note Add in all other electronic telephones if upgradingan existing Strata DK system using 2000 6000 6005 serieselectronic telephones existing B4 Separate BGM source connected to electronictelephone circuit required 1 maximum existing 85 Extern...

Page 50: ...s per HDSS console 1 port per HDCB 3 max 2 ports per Amplifier 1 port _ _ Digitaltelephone equipped with PDIU D12 or ADM only require 1 digital port 1 Door Phone Control Box DDCB supportsthree Door Phones MDFBs C2 Determine Standard Port Requirements from B5 I A Total Standard Telephones On and Off Premise 1 B Total Voice Mail Ports C Total FAX or MODEM devices D Total ACD and Auto Attendant Digit...

Page 51: ...orts circuits Circuit 2 only can connect to a separate Background Music BGM source TheRSTU can be equipped with an R48S to extend the loop length of the RSTU from 600 ohms to 1200ohms see Table 1 4 RSTU2 is required to operate message waitinglamps on a standard telephone C4 3 RDSU RSTS can be used when four or less digital or standard ports are needed Total RDSU PCBsI Ifour digitalkwo standard por...

Page 52: ...d requirements eight exist already from Company As A Total RCOU RCOS PCB Slots Loop Start Lines 8 8 PCOU Loop Start Lines B RGLU RCOU or PCOU PCB Slots 4 4 existing U C5 1 Total Loop Start Llne slots A B RGLU can provide loop or ground start lines General Notes RCOU provides four loop start CO lines in its basic configuration An RCOS can be attached to the RCOU to add four more loop start CO lines...

Page 53: ...ling Wink or Immediate Start 2 or 4 wire transmission The PEMU1 can also be used ThePEMU only provides Type I signaling 2 or 4 wire transmissionand Immediate Start See Table I I for REMU PEMU maximum quantities Each REMU or PEMU reduces system station port line and capacity by four ports and four lines C5 5 DetermineAnalog DID Line PCB Slot Requirements Total DID lines with or without ANVDNIS need...

Page 54: ...ed systems The RCTUA does not suppo RDTU Each tie or DID line reduces the system stationport capacity by oneport Total CO LINE PCB Slots C5 RCOU RCOS from 25 1 PCOU from C5 1 RGLU from C5 1 5 2 RClU RClS from C5 3 REMU from C5 4 RDDU from C5 5 RDTU from C5 6 C5T Total CO line PCB Slots C6 Attendant Console Slots C6T RATU PCB Slot one requiredfor 1 4 Attendant Console Maximum c7 PlOU PIOUS RSlU RSS...

Page 55: ...PEPU Page Option PCB PEPU provide600 ohm interfaceor 5 watt page output Total PEPU PCBs Slots C9 Total System Slots C4T C5T C9T Total Slots C9T CIO Total Cabinets C6T C7T C8T 6 6 C11 Go to Worksheet 2 and fill in Worksheet 2 Chart A DK0154 January1996 1 43 ...

Page 56: ... are skipped and left empty Remember to install subassembly PCBs onto plug in PCBs before inserting plug in PCBs into cabinet slots Starting with Slot 13 install all station ground and loop start lines2 and option PCBs3from left to right from lowest to highest numbered slots without leaving any empty slots4 They may be intermixed in cabinets and do not have to be placed in consecutive order by PCB...

Page 57: ...IU Tie and DID line PCBs include REMU RDDU PEMU and RDTU tie DID line PCBs use station ports and CO line ports in DK280 software so they should not be installed in lower numbered slots than station PCBs whenever practical This will prevent station port number shifting which could causeproblems with BLF station directory number or Primary Directory Number PDN sequences If installing an RDTU see Wor...

Page 58: ...ith PDKU1 but do support OCA slots do not supporf PDKUl PCBs slots support PDKU2 but do not support OCA slots do not support OCA RPCI DI l or PDIU DI DS with PDKUl or PDKU2 PDKU1 does not support continuous DTMF tones on 2000 seriesdigital telephones All slots support RPCI DI if it is connected to PDKU2 when the RPCl is used for API computers only and is not used for switched data calls RPCI to RP...

Page 59: ...in the allowed slot shown to Slot Number the left of this column 13 1 BaseUnit I 14 3 Expansion Unit 12 Expansion Unit 121 I22 I 23 24 25 26 31 32 33 34 35 6 ExpansionUnit 14 ExpansionUnit 141 I42 43 I44 45 61 162 15 Expansion Unit 151 I52 53 154 55 DK0157 Note 1 RDTU PCBs can only be installed in the Allowed slots shown GeneralNotes If installingan RDTU with 1 24 channels Install the RDTU in the ...

Page 60: ...ne Nos Option Note 1LiC k Port Nos Line Nos Option Note CABINET 3 S31 PCB Type Port Nos Line Nos Option Note I I CABINET I s41 I PCBType I I CABINET6 I S61 I PCBType I I Line NOS I RCTU s11 s12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S22 I S23 I S24 I S25 I S26 I S27 I S28 S42 I S43 I S44 I S45 I S46 I S47 I S48 S52 I S53 I S54 I S55 I S56 I S57 I S58 Option Note DK0160 1 48 January1996 ...

Page 61: ...upport2 RRCS PCBs total24 DTMF receivers maximum C RKYS 1 2 3 or 4 for ACD MIS plus built in Auto Attendant If auto attendant built in ACD ACD MIS or System Open Architecture OA port is required one RKYS option key is requiredsee Table 1 4 D EOCU refer to Table 1 4 An EOCU must be installed on each PEKU and or PESU that is connectedto electronictelephones which are equipped to receive Off hook Cal...

Page 62: ... continued H PlOU RSlU Subassembly PCBs IMDU PCB HI H2 H3 PIOUS RMDS PCB installedon RSlU in slot 11 Actual HHEU PCBs IActual HESC 65As I Four Telephoneswith headsets PBTC3M 1 50 January1996 RBTC1A 2M PPTC 25 pin OK0164 PpTc 9 9 pin ...

Page 63: ...mit and receivevoice and data calls and or interface with an Application Program Interface API personal computer for 2000 series DKTS RBDB Battery Box Requiredwhen connecting reserve power batteriesto three or more cabinets wall or floor mount see Chapter 3 Cabinet Installation Figure3 23 3 26 Q RBDB refer to Table 1 7 R RCCB refer to Table 1 7 RCCB conduit box is requiredfor floor mount installat...

Page 64: ...ntationfor detailed informationabout the VM machines and to C2 of Worksheet 2 in this chapter for DK280 VM port requirements V Personal Computers for Attendant Consoles with RAT1and RATHC 280Admin 28OBackup SMlS for ACD System Open Architecture W Other Customer Supplied Items I n 4 5 6 DK0168 1 52 January1996 ...

Page 65: ... 4 0 0 3 IMDU I AC Input Current I 2 5A I 5 OA I 7 5A I10 OA I 11 5A I11 5A I 0 16 1 A C Current Limitation by National Electric Code Table 1 13 Printed Circuit Board PCB Power Factors PF PCB Type RCTUA RCTUB I 1 0 RCTUC D RCTUBA BB RRCS 4 RRCS 8 RRCS 12 PCOU1 2 PDKUl 2 0 3 RATU RClU I 0 2 RClS I 0 1 PCB Type RDSU 24V PSTU RSTU 24V I 0 5 RCOU 4 CO RCOU RCOS 8 CO REMU PEMU RGLU I 2 5 RDDU I 7 0 PEP...

Page 66: ...ty x Power pF Factor Total x 1 v x 2 0 X 2 5 x 2 0 x 2 0 x 1 0 x 1 2 x 0 8 X 0 4 __ X 0 5 X 0 5 __ X 0 8 __ x 1 0 X 0 5 X 4 0 __ X 3 0 __ x 0 1 Total Power Factor __ EXP CABINET CAB 4 Quantity X Power pF Factor Total x 1 0 x 2 0 X 2 5 x 2 0 x 2 0 x 1 0 x 1 2 __ X 0 8 X 0 4 X 0 5 X 0 5 X 0 8 x 1 0 X 0 5 X 4 0 X 3 0 x 0 1 Total Power Factor __ EXP CABINET CAB 2 Quantity X Power pF Factor Total x 1 0...

Page 67: ... Slot 3 I I Slot 4 I Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 6 I I Slot 7 Slot 8 Telephone Device PF See Chart 1 Telephone Device PF ISee Chart 1 Total Cabinet PF I I I Total Cabinet PF I CABINET 4 CABINET 5 CABINET 6 Slots I PCBTme I PF I I Slots I PCBTwe I PF I Slots Slot 1 PCB Type Slot 1 I I I Slot 2 I I I Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 3 I Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Sl...

Page 68: ...January1996 1 56 ...

Page 69: ...for battery installation requirements 2 2 Site Considerations 2 2 1 Clearance and Location Requirements The base and optional expansion cabinets may be either floor or wall mounted Figure 2 1 shows the minimum clearance requirements Notes 1 Floor mounting requires the following additional hardware that is not necessary for wall mounting see Chapter 3 Cabinet Installation for details RFIF floor mou...

Page 70: ...PANSION CABINET a EXPANSION WALL I 24 24 24 1 6 WALL 23 6 36 1 MINIMUMCLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS WALL MOUNTING FRONT VIEW WALL TOP VIEW t 24 23 6 3 FLOOR MOUNT STANDS RFMF I 1_ 3 RWBF I 36 MINIMUMCLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS FLOOR MOUNTING DK0043 Figure 2 1 Minimum Clearance Requirements 2 2 January 1996 ...

Page 71: ... 135VAC 15 Ampere circuit 50 60 Hz 1 cabinet 3 6 amps 2 cabinets 5 2 amps 3 cabinets 7 8 amps 4 cabinets 10 4 amps 5 or 6 cabinets 11 5 amps 32 104 F 0 40 C 4 158 F 20 70 C 20 80 relative humidity without condensation 24VDC 26 3 27 8VDC 5VDC 4 5 5 5VDC SVDC 4 5 5 5VDC Charger current limiting Nominalfloat voltage 2 275 volts cell Charge current 0 6 amps per cabinet 3 6 amps max Battery discharge c...

Page 72: ...n the allowed maximum 4 distance o f each other as designated by Table 2 2 2 4 Grounding Requirements The system requires a solid earth ground for proper operation System AC power cords already contain a conductor for the third wire ground provided by the commercial outlet But in addition an insulated conductor must be connected between the frame ground on any cabinet power supply and a cold water...

Page 73: ...s 1 4 2 pair Shares digital telephone wire pair 1 pair I RPCI DI PDIU D12 or PDKU Ckts 1 8 RDSU Ckts 5 8 or 40 ohms 1000ft 303 m 40 ohms 1000ft 303 m PDIU DS PDKU ckts 1 8 or RDSU ckts 5 8 ADM PDKU ckts 1 8 or RDSU ckts 5 8 Shares digital telephone wire pair 1 pair 40 ohms 40 ohms 1000ft 303 m 1000ft 303 m DDCB PDKU or RDSU ckt 5 PEKU ckt 5 or PESU2 ckt 5 2 pair I 1 pair HDCB HDSS consoles PEKU ck...

Page 74: ...p voltage or if equipped with the 4 8 volt loop option PCB R48S OL13A OL138 or OL13Cmay be used for OPSconnection 2 When ordering DS lfll circuits six items must be specified a Thenumber of channelsper T1 circuit fractionalincrements are normally 8 12 or 16 channels full service is 24 channels Unused channelsmust be bit stuffed b The type of CO line assigned to each channel Loop Start Ground Start...

Page 75: ...h the back soldered side or edge connector Always hold the PCB by its edges When packaging and storing the system remove PCBs from the system cabinet the power supply may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment PCBs should be packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge Be sure to package equipment in its original shipping containers 3 ...

Page 76: ...G wire spade lug to the power supply with the FG screw 6 Secure the power supply to the cabinet with the four providedscrews 7 If the cabinet is the base unit plug the jumper plug that has a wire connected into the DKSUB jumper connector on the power supply 8 If the cabinet is an expansion unit DKSUE plug the jumper plug that does not have a wire connected into the DKSUE jumper connector IMPORTANT...

Page 77: ... Loosenfour screws to remove the top cover Do not remove the top cover if the Base Cabinet is the top cabinet I Remove this screw to remove the front cover RIGHT SIDE COVER DK0174 Loosen three screws to remove front cover V Loosentwo screws to remove the side covers right and left side covers Figure 3 1 Cabinet Front Side and Top Cover Removal and Installation January1996 3 3 ...

Page 78: ...BASE Figure 3 2 DK280 Power Supply RPSU280 Installation 1 1 FG WIRE AND SPADE LUG I I Functional Ground I 1 I 1 1 I I 1 I 1 1 m l T I I Q I I I I I I JUMPER E H W MUST BE I INSTALLED ONLY IN BASE CABINET I POWER SUPPLY USlNGTHlS CONNECTOR I JUMPER WITH NO WIRE MUST BE INSTALLED IN I ALL EXPANSION BASE CABINET POWER JUMPER SUPPLY USING I THIS CONNECTOR RPSU 280 POWER SUPPLY DK0175 January1996 3 4 ...

Page 79: ... CABLE CONNECTOR DK0176 A FG WIRE HOLDER BOTTOM 2 MOUNTING SCREWS FG WIRE AND SPADE LUG Functional ground FRAME GROUND OR POWER SUPPLY DAISY CHAIN GROUND TO NEXT POWER SUPPLY Figure 3 3 DK280 Power Supply RPSU280 Removal 3 5 January1996 ...

Page 80: ...must be completely removed should only be loosened and the covers slid to the right for removal 3 Hold the base cabinet back cover against the wall or backboard so that its two top mounting holes are 5 1 2 feet 66 inches above the floor Figure 3 8 This will allow six cabinets to be installed 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 top down with a six inch clearance between the floor and bottom cabinet Use a...

Page 81: ...Figure 3 4 DEALER SUPPLIED I2X 1 25 WOOD SCREWS 4 SCREWS PER BACK COVER DKOl77 t Cabinet Mounting Surface Diagram Directly on Wall I I I 3 7 January1996 ...

Page 82: ...as necessaryto secure plywood backboard DEALER SUPPLIED 12 X 1 25 WOOD SCREWS 4 SCREWS PER CAI31NET t P 4 PLYWOOD BACKBOARD 3 4 THICK MINIMUM BACK COVER DK0178 FLOOR Figure 3 5 Cabinet Mounting Surface Diagram with Plywood Backboard 5 5 ft for six cabinets January1996 3 8 ...

Page 83: ...CABINET ONLY Remove this screw to remove the front cover SIDE COVER Loosen three screws to remove front cover to remove the side covers right and left side covers SIDE COVER Loosen two screws to remove the side cover right and left covers A Figure 3 6 Cabinet Cover Removaland Installation V remove back cover DK0179 January1996 3 9 ...

Page 84: ...OARD BACK COVER I 2 X 1 25 WOOD SCREWS As many as necessaryto secure plywood backboard Figure 3 7 Cabinet Back Cover Mounting I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L Note Locating Parts are factory installed They are necessary for wall mount installationsonly They should be removed for floor mountinstallations 5 5 ft for six cabinets ll FLOOR DK0180 January1996 3 10 ...

Page 85: ...MARKING HOLE BACK COVER DK0181 Figure 3 8 Back Cover Mounting Holes 3 11 January1996 ...

Page 86: ...DKOl82 Figure 3 9 Mounting Cabinet on Back Cover 3 12 January1996 ...

Page 87: ...ORTANT Data cable shield doors must be closed and secured at all times during the system operation CAB 2 CABLE BONDING UI LEFT SIDE 7 i i CONNECTION PLATES Requiredfor all wall mount expansioncabinets TO MDF Figure 3 10 left Side View of Cabinet Interior CABLE GUARD PCB CABLES FRONT January1996 3 13 ...

Page 88: ...ON PLATES Requiredfor all wall mountedexpansion cabinets on both rright and left sides TO AC OUTLET DK0184 Figure 3 11 Right Side View of Cabinet Interior RPSBl OR RPSB2 POWER STRIP See Figure4 20 for RPSB1 and RPSB2 cabinet locations 3 14 January1996 ...

Page 89: ...4 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CABLES CABINET NO I I I DK0185 Figure 3 12 Front View of Cabinet Interiors 3 15 January1996 ...

Page 90: ...R KNOCKOUT PLASTIC A CABLES RUN OUT TnD OF CABINET S B CABLES RUN OUT OF SIDE OF CABINET S C CABLES RUN OUT TO MDF Figure 3 13 DK280 Cabinet Floor Installation 25 PAIR AMPHENOL CABLES DK0186 January1996 3 16 ...

Page 91: ...n data cable doors then connect the first expansion cabinet data cable to the CAB 2 top data cable connector on the base cabinet Install data cables in appropriate connectors for all other expansion cabinets Figures 3 10 and 3 19 7 After all data cables are installed close data cable doors and secure them with the locking screw IMPORTANT Data cable door screws must be firmly tightened for proper s...

Page 92: ...et installthem now Figures 3 20 and 3 24 connect reserve power cable to the cabinet Figures 3 20 and 3 26 12 Reinstallcovers on cabinets 3 5 Cabinet Floor Mounting Strata DK280 systems can be floor mounted Floor mounting requires an installation kit RFIF which contains the following parts Figure 3 14 Two floor fixtures RFMF1 and two screws for each fixture These may not be labeled as RFMF Six wall...

Page 93: ...t be completely removed should only be loosened and the covers slid to the right for removal Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using Phillips screwdriver Figure3 7 3 Install a floor fixture RFMF1 on each side of the bottom cabinet Figure 3 14 Make sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge Note The bottom cabinet can be the base cabinet DKSUB280 or an expansion ca...

Page 94: ...rom all cabinet back covers using a Phillips screwdriver Figure 3 7 3 Install a floor fixture RFMFI on each side of the bottom cabinet Figures 3 14 and 3 15 making sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge 4 Secure a wall bracket RWBFI to both floor fixtures with the screws provided Secure the wall brackets to the wall with customer provided wood screws and wall anchors Figures 3 14 and ...

Page 95: ... WITH RWBFs ON EACH SIDE USE 12 X 1 25 WOOD SCREWS AND WALL ANCHORS AS REQUIRED 3 FLOOR FIXTURE RFMF MUST BE FIXEDTO FLOOR BY EITHER ANCHOR BOLTS OR WALL BY RWBF WALL BRACKETS See Figure 3 15 THIRD CABINET WALL SECURING BRACKET RWBFIA Note 1 Leftand right side BOTTOM WALL SECURING BRACKET RWBFIA RFMF MOUNTING SCREWS ANCHOR BOLTS 2 RFMF I S INSIDE ANCHOR BOLTS 2 See Figure 3 15 3 16 3 17 and 3 18 D...

Page 96: ...BFIA 3 pairs and RFMFIA I pair are supplied with floor installation kit RFIF I FLOOR MOUNTMETHOD 2 I AFRONTTWO SCREWS LEFT AND RIGHT SIDES B BACK TWO SCREWS LEFT AND RIGHT SIDES RFMF P RWBF I I RWBF RWMt RWBF RWBF RWBF RWMF Note RWBFIA 3 pairs and RFMFIA 1 pair are supplied with floor installationkit RFIF DK0188 Figure 3 15 Floor Mounting Cabinets Methods 1 and 2 3 22 January1996 ...

Page 97: ...minationof power equipment by dust created during drilling 5 Using a hammer drill drill holes to accept 3 8 inch bolt anchors 6 Install the bolt anchors with plugs in the drilled holes as shown in Figure 3 16 7 Usingthe driving tool and a hammer drive each bolt anchor into the floor 8 Move the Base Cabinet into position on the equipment room floor 9 Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using bolts...

Page 98: ...ling Note Cover the Base Cabinet with a suitable drop cloth to prevent contamination o f power equipmentby dust created during drilling 5 Drill pilot holes to make insertion of318 inch lag bolts easier and to prevent splitting of wood flooring 6 Move the Base Cabinet into position on the equipment room floor 7 Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using lag bolts lockwashers and flat washers as sho...

Page 99: ...t anchors 8 Installthe bolt anchors with plugs in the drilled holes 9 Using the driving tool and a hammer drive each bolt anchor into the floor 10 Screw threaded rods into each bolt anchor 11 Install a hex nut lockwasher and flat washer on each threaded rod Screw the nuts down far 12 Replacetiles over threaded rods in their original positions on the floor 13 Reach under the tiles and screw the hex...

Page 100: ...tion 3 5 2 For systems with three or more cabinets that are not bolted to the floor Method 2 refer to Subsection3 5 2 3 6 Grounding Requirements The system requires a solid earth ground for proper operation and safety Failure to provide ground may be a safety hazard or lead to confusing trouble symptoms and in extreme cases system failure The AC power cord s already contains a conductor for the th...

Page 101: ...ET OR GROUND ROD PER GENERAL RULES OF MOTHER BOARD ARTICLE 250 OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE NFPA70 INTERCABlNET POWER SUPPLY GROUND WIRE AC117V 50 60 Hz 1 THIRD WIRE GROUND TO 1 AC POWER THIRD WIRE AC GROUND A rh BUILDING MAIN POWER PANEL ELECTRICAL GROUND AC117V 50 60 Hz DEDICATED 15 AMP BRANCH CIRCUIT Figure 3 19 System Grounding Diagram January1996 3 27 ...

Page 102: ...me Ground Test Use the following procedure to test the frame ground point B in Figure 3 19 conductor for continuity WARNING Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the following test Use great care when working with AC power line voltage 1 Refer to Figure 3 19 2 Disconnect the AC plug s of the system to make sure that the separate earth ground paths are separated 3 Wit...

Page 103: ...orkproperly 3 7 3 Floor Mounted Systems with Three or More Cabinets UL specifies that floor mounted systems with three or more cabinets require the installation of a Conduit Connection Box RCCBI to connect AC power cabling and reserve power to the system Cabling from the AC power source to the conduit connection box can only be installed by a licensed electrician Figures 3 21 and 3 22 AC power cab...

Page 104: ...the open negativeterminal of the second 12VDC battery 4 5 6 IMPORTANT The cabinet s must be connected to fhe iive AC power source and the power supply ON OFF switch set to ON prior to the final step of connecting the reservepower batteries fo the power supply via the BATT receptacle If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost reserve power will not function Connect the PBTC 3M battery ca...

Page 105: ...e or more cabinets require the installation of a Conduit Connection Box RCCB1 to connect reserve power cabling and AC power cabling to the system refer to Figures 3 21 and 3 22 Only a qualified electrician can install cabling between the reserve power source and AC power cabling and the conduit connection box All other steps required to install reserve power including installation of the Battery D...

Page 106: ...DBI TWO AC OUTLETS 11 5 amp max b BATTERY RPSBl OR RPSB2 OUTLET STRIP r ro AC OUTLET FLOOR MOUNT Conduit RPSBI RPSB1 RPSB2 RBDBI ONE AC OUTLET 11 5 amp max BATTERYCABL RBTCIA 2M RBTCIA 2M ES RPSBI RPSBI RBDBI RCCBl IRFMFI AC CONDUIT TO DISTRIBUTIONPANEL DC CONDUIT TO BATTERY Figure 3 20 Outlet Strip RPSB1 and RPSB2 Installation 3 32 January 1996 ...

Page 107: ...Bto RBDB CABLE CONNECTOR BUILDING MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL RBDBIA BATTERY DISTRIBUTION ELECTRICAL USE BOX Shown mounted cover VII 12 AWGWIRE Minimum RFMF FLOOR MOUNT FIXTURE L LINE WIRE Hot N NEUTRALWIRE FG GROUND WIRE 14 AWG WIRE Minimum RACK F1 24AMP FUSE 12 VOLT BATTER1ES See Table 3 1 and Figure 3 26 for battery specifications and I wiring guidelines GeneralNote AC DC wiringandconduit A and 73 ...

Page 108: ... REMOVE COVER RIGHT SIDE VIEW a 0 I I DKOl95 RCCB1 Shown REMOVE BOTTOM 2 COVER SCREWS TO REMOVE COVER I CONDUIT BATTERY WIRES To AC POWER 12 AWG minimum 1 2 INCH WIRE 24 AMPS MAX Tradesize 14 AWG minimum 1I 5 AMPS MAX Figure 3 22 Conduit Connection Box RCCB Requiredto Floor Mount Three or More DK280 Cabinets Only January 1996 3 34 ...

Page 109: ...RES TO DEDICATEDAC OUTLET See Important Note 120V AC 11 5 Amps Max TWO AC POWER CORDS FROM RPSU280 POWER SUPPLIES Cabinet 1 and 2 Important If local electric code allows only one AC cord from the system install a RPSB2 in the bottom cabinet per Figure 3 20 Plug power supplies into the RPSB2 and plug the RPSB2 into the dedicated wall outlet DKO196 Figure 3 23 AC and Reserve Power One or Two Cabinet...

Page 110: ...OVE COVER RIGHT SIDE VIEW 0 0197 Fi 10 amps each p RBDBI Shown with cover off TOP MOUNTING HOLE TOP MOUNTING RBDB1 Shown with coveron BOTTOM MOUNTING HOLE Figure 3 24 Battery Distribution Box RBDB Installation Wall Floor Mount Three or More Cabinets with Reserve Battery Back Up 93 la Batt 1 L BOTTOM MOUNTING SCREW January1996 3 36 ...

Page 111: ...neral Notes Six RBTCIA 1 5Mcables are supplied with each RBDBIA One cable i s supplied with each RBTCIA 2M RBTCIA 1 5M CABLES FROM RBDB PSU CONNECTORSTO INDIVIDUAL POWER SUPPLY RBSU280 B A T CONNECTORS BATTERY d l BATTERY DISTRIBUTION CABINET OR RACK BOX RBDBIA 3or more cabinets WHITE WIRES 16 AWG WIRE RBTCIAQM CABLES T BATTERIES TO RBDB DISTRIBUTIONBOX 6 5 ft cables 12 AMP FUSE Figure 3 25 Reserv...

Page 112: ...RS 12VOLT4 BATTERIES 80 AMP HR EACH WHITE WIRE BASE CABINET RPSU 280 BATT WIRE PBTC CABLE 9 ft 4 BATTERIES 2 CABINETS without RBDB 10A FUSE BASE CABINET RPSU280 BATT PBTC CABLES 9 ft 3 12 VOLT4 BAlTERIE 80 AMPI HR EACH 2 BATTERIES 2 CABINETS without RBDB 12 VOLT4 BAlTERIES 80 AMPI HR EACH cover removed RBTCIA 1 5M CABLE 6 max 1 WHITE WIRE BASE CABINET RPSU280 BATT IDA FUSE WIRE BLACK PBTC CABLES 9...

Page 113: ... empty slots except when installing RDTU PCBs when required per Tables 1 9 and 1 10 of Chapter 1 Configuration After all station attendant console and ground loop start line and RCIU RCIS PCBs are installed install all DID and tie line PCBs starting from the first numbered empty slot to the highest needed in left to right order Do not leave empty slots except when installing RDTU PCBs per Tables 1...

Page 114: ...I ...

Page 115: ...ging and Storage CAUTION When handling insfalling removing examining PCBs do not touch the back soldered side or edge connector Always hold the PCB by its edges When packaging and storing the system remove PCBs from the system cabinet the power supply may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment PCBs should be packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electr...

Page 116: ...led in these slots See Table 1 9 in Worksheet 2 in Chapter 1 Configuration S21 S26 S31 S32 S41 S46 S51 S52 Note Telephones that provide handset OCA and RPCI DI TAP1 mode features can ot7ly be connected to PDKUl or 2 PCBs installed in any slot since these features do not require a 2B channel slot The following limitations apply to the RDTU T I interface PCB see Worksheet 2 Table 1 9 and 1 10 in Cha...

Page 117: ...ates a 68000 type microprocessor and contains a custom time switch and Conference Large Scale Integration LSI circuitry The unit also provides busy tone detection as a standard feature for Auto Busy Redial ABR and interfaces with optional RRCS DTMF receivers feature keys RKYSI 2 3 or 4 for Auto Attendant AA Automatic Call Distribution ACD Management Information System MIS for ACD ACD MIS Toshiba p...

Page 118: ...are The common control units RCTUA RCTUA3 RCTUB RCTUB2 RCTUBA BB RCTUCI DI RCTUCI D2 and RCTUC3 D3 support the following hardware options Options Internal Options E DTMF receiver unit RRCS 4 RRCS 8 RRCS 12 There are three RRCSs the RRCS 4 has four DTMF receiver circuits the RRCS 8 has eight receiver circuits and the RRCS 12 has 12 receiver circuits The RCTUAI and RCTUA3 can support up to 12 DTMF r...

Page 119: ...P5 The connectors are positioned to allow installation of the RRCS only in the proper position Mate RRCS connectors J1 J2 J3 and J4 Figure 4 2 with RCUTA or RCTUB connectors P2 P3 P4 P5 The connectors on each of the three RRCS versions are labeled J1 J2 J3 and J4 Apply firm even pressure to the RRCS to ensure proper mating of the connectors RCTU D ONLY RKYSIA AA ONLY R1 and above or RKYS2A ANACD R...

Page 120: ...re labeledJ1 J2 J3 and J4 Apply firm even pressure to the RRCS to ensure proper mating of the connectors 4 3 2 Common Control Installation Procedures L RCTU PCB Installation Install the RCTU common control unit in accordance with the following steps refer to Figures4 4 4 14 CAUTION Do not remove the plastic insulation shield from the back of the RCTU PCB If the shield comes off do not allow the ba...

Page 121: ...d If RAM contains configuration or feature data from previous programming that should be retained do not run Program 91 9 See the Programming Part If installing a RCTU PCB Release 3 or above perform a processor RAM test using Program 00 part 2 On new RCTU installations the RAM test should be run after RCTU initialization and before entering the customer database Overview Program 00 part 2 RCTU RAM...

Page 122: ... DTMF Receiver subassembly RRCS Used in conjunction with P2 P4 and P5 Interfaceconnector for optional DTMF Receiver subassembly RRCS Used in conjunction with P2 P3 and P5 Interfaceconnector for optional DTMF Receiver subassembly RRCS Used in conjunction with P2 P3 and P4 Interfaceconnector for on board lithium batterythat protects configuration data stored in system RAM Interfaceconnector for MOH ...

Page 123: ...or for optional DTMF Receiversubassembly RRCS Used in conjunction with P2 P3 and P5 Interfaceconnector for optional DTMF Receiversubassembly RRCS Used in conjunction with P2 P3 and P4 Interfaceconnector for on board lithium batterythat protects configuration data stored in system RAM RCA jack Interfaceconnector for MOH BGM source Connector for ribbon Connectorfor connection with future cable featu...

Page 124: ...ctionwith P3 P4 and P6 10 pin male connector DTMF ReceiverConnector P6 BATT BatteryJumper P9 MOH BGM Source Connector RCTUC Ribbon Cable Connector P I1 MOH BGM Source Volume ControlVR1 6 pin male connector Interfaceconnector for optional DTMF Receiversubassembly RRCS Used in conjunctionwith P3 P4 and P5 Interfaceconnector fqr on board lithium battery that protects configurationdata stored in syste...

Page 125: ...ectorfor RCTUC ribbon cables Used with P2 Connectorfor RCTUC ribbon cable Used with P l l Interfaceconnector for optional DTMF Used in conjunction with P6 P7 and 1 P8 Receiver subassembly RRCS Interfaceconnector for optional DTMF Receiver subassembly RRCS Used in conjunction with P5 P7 and P8 Interface connector for optional DTMF Receiver subassembly RRCS Used in conjunction with P5 P6 and P8 Inte...

Page 126: ...ional DTMF Receiversubassembly RRCS Used in coniunction with P3 P4 and P5 DTMF Receiver Connector P3 6 pin male connector Interfaceconnector for optional DTMF Receiversubassembly RRCS Used in coniunction with P2 P4 and P5 DTMF Receiver Connector P4 DTMF ReceiverConnector P5 BATT Battery Jumper P8 3 terminal jumper Interfaceconnector for on board lithium batterythat protects configuration data stor...

Page 127: ...P8 RCTUD Connector P2 Red LED RCTUD Connector P3 Flashes to indicate operation 1 4 second on 1 4 second off DTMF Receiver Connector P5 DTMF Receiver Connector P6 DTMF Receiver Connector P7 DTMF Receiver Connector P8 Heart Beat Indicator CD5 10 pin male connector 6 pin male connector Interfaceconnectorfor optional DTMF Receiver subassembly RRCS Used in conjunctionwith P5 P6 and P8 Interfaceconnecto...

Page 128: ...onnector for MOH BGMsource DTMF ReceiverConnector P5 6 pin male connector BATT Battery Jumper P8 3 terminaljumper MOH BGM Source Connector RCA jack Future Feature UpgradeConnector P I1 Connector for ribbon cable Connector for connectionwith future feature upgrade PCB Connectorfor connection with RSlU PCB see Figure 4 31 Adjusts volume for MOH BGMsource connectedto RCTUA3 Future Feature Upgrade Con...

Page 129: ...ptional DTMF Receiversubassembly RRCS Interfaceconnector for on board lithium battery that protects configurationdata stored in system RAM 6 pin male connector 10 pin male connector 6 pin male connector Used in conjunction with P3 P4 and P5 3 terminal jumper MOH BGM Source Connector RCTUBA Ribbon Cable Connector P11 RCA jack Connectorand ribbon cable Interface connector for MOH BGM source Ribbon c...

Page 130: ...ctor for RCTUBA and RSlU ribbon cable Used with P l l Flashesto indicate operation 1 4 second on 1 4 second off P1 IDENTIFIES ROM VERSION ClO IC9 I CD5 HEARTBEAT W LED CBRUK PROGRAM IC9 10 11 AND 12 ROMS TO RCTUBNRSIU CONNECTORS u3 1 INSTALL IN RCTU SLOT RKYS KEYS IA 2A 3A OR 4 CKET 5 I RIBBON CABLE TO RCTUBA RIBBON CABLE TO RCTUBA AND RSlU IF INSTALLED SEE FIGURE4 39 Figure 4 12 RCTUBB Controls I...

Page 131: ...assembly RRCS Used in conjunction with P3 P4 and P6 DTMF Receiver Connector P5 I RCA jack Connector and ribbon cable DTMF Receiver Connector P6 Interface connector for MOH BGM source Ribbon cable connector for RCTUD and RSIU Used in coniunction with P2 I MOH BGM Source Connector RCTUC Ribbon Cable Connector P11 IMOH BGM Source IVolume Control VR1 RRCS CONNECTORS RRCS CONNECTORS 6 pin male connecto...

Page 132: ... DTMF Receiver subassembly RRCS Used in conjunctionwith P5 P7 and P8 6 pin male connector 10 pin male connector DTMF Receiver Connector P7 10 pin male connector Interfaceconnector for optional DTMF Receiver subassembly RRCS Used in conjunctionwith P5 P6 and P8 DTMF Receiver Connector P8 Heart Beat Indicator CD5 6 pin male connector Red LED Flashesto indicate operation 1 4 second on 114 second off ...

Page 133: ...n work in any slot See Table 1 8 of Worksheet 2 in Chapter 1 Configuration S21 S26 S31 S32 S41 S46 S51 S52 PDKUI does not support continuous DTMF tones with DKT2000 series telephones PDKU2 does support continuous DTMF tones Some of the devices that interface with the PDKU PDKU1 and PDKU2 can be connected to any cir it on the PCB Others can only be connected to specific circuits which are noted as ...

Page 134: ... Off hook Call Announce OCA and or DlUs and RPCI DI Data mode Specify Code 64 to indicate a PDKU supporting a DDSS console Speaker OCA DIUs and RPCI DI Data mode 4 Notes 1 If there are no PDKU options Program 03 can be skipped and Program 91 1 or 91 9 can be run instead 2 For RPCI DI TAP1 mode only and Handset OCA code 61 can be used and the PDKU can be in any universal cabinet slot Programs 20 21...

Page 135: ...econnector for optional Off hook Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P40 P50 and P60 Interfaceconnector for optional Off hook Call Announce subassemblyconnector used in conjunction with P10 P20 P50 and P60 Interface connector for optional Off hook Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P20 P40 and P60 Interfaceconnector for optional Off hook C...

Page 136: ...onic telephonesfor Speaker OCA Note Electronic telephones do not support handset OCA External Options Note Refer to Chapter 5 Station Apparatus and Chapter 6 Peripheral Installation for installation of electronic telephones including the following upgrades HVSU2 or HVSU HVSI for Off hook Call Announce and HHEU for headset and or loud ringing bell interface and external options respectively W HDSS ...

Page 137: ... console W Specify Code 24 to indicate a PEKU conigured for Speaker OCA and an HDSS console W Door phones the BGM source connection and external amplifiers do not require a special code Note If there are no PEKU options Program 03 can be skipped and Program 91 can be run instead Programs 10 2and 19 BGM connection Programs 1O 3 Assigns external amplifiers to ports Programs28 and 29 HDSS console ass...

Page 138: ...l the R48S on the RSTU or RSTU2 in accordance with the following procedure 1 Remove the R48S from its protectivepackaging 2 Remove the RSTUfrom its protectivepackaging Note RSTU connectors P6 and P7 are positioned to allow installation of the R48S only in the proper position Figure 4 18and 4 20 In f K P A Figure 4 18 R48S Interface Connectors 3 Mate the R48S connectors P6 and P7 Figure 4 18 and 4 ...

Page 139: ...0 pin Connector 6 pin Connector Sets ring generator voltage level for all circuits H 19OV P P L 130V P P Interface connector to P6 of R48S Interface connector to P7 of R48S I BACKPLANECONNECTOR L I w1 m H L SSTU SUBUNIT 50 PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR FEMALE Figure 4 19 PSTU and Subunit SSTU BACKPLANECONNECTOR I U RSTU OR RSTU2 0 R48S INSTALLED ON RSTUP 50 PIN AMPHENOL OPTIONAL CONNECTOR FEMALE Figure 4...

Page 140: ...s 1 and 2 and four digital telephone ports Circuits 5 8 An optional Standard Telephone Interface Subunit RSTS can be attached to the RDSU to provide two more standard telephone ports Circuits3 and 4 The RDSU digital telephone circuits can support any of the devices that the PDKU can except for the DDSS console The RDSU standardtelephone circuits including the RSTS circuits can support all of the d...

Page 141: ...bassembly that provides two standard telephone circuits RSTS Connector P4 P5 R48S Connector P6 R48S Connector P7 Figure 4 21 RSTS RDSU Controls Indicators and Interface Connectors 10 pin Connector 8 pin Connector 6 pin Connector Connector for RSTS subassemblythat provides two standard telephone circuits Interfaceconnector for R48S Interfaceconnector for R48S 3 January1996 4 27 ...

Page 142: ...e slot and apply firm even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors 5 After installing the RDSU gently pull the RDSU outward If the connectors are properly mated a light resistance will be felt 4 7 3 RDSU Wiring Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Diagrams for RDSU wiring interconnecting and secondary protector details The RDSU is registered for use with OL13A OL13B or OL13C type lines for off premise...

Page 143: ... EOCU EQUIP FOR OCA FEATURE 0 CUT W9 FOR DOOR PHONE OPTION HDCB ON CIRCUIT 5 I ESTS u 1 0 PESU P90 DK0274 BACKPLANE CONNECTOR RING VOLTAGE OPTION PORTS 1 2 L LOW LEVEL 13OVP P H HIGH LEVEL 19OV P P ESTS STANDARD TELEPHONE INTERFACE ALWAYS EQUIPPED FROM FACTORY General Note Connect two ringers maximum per port H or L Figure 4 22 PESU PCB Option Location and Identification 4 29 January1996 ...

Page 144: ...Speaker OCA electronic telephone Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Diagrams for wiring interconnectingdetails 5 Refer to Section 5 2 of Chapter 5 Station Apparatus for procedures to add required speaker OCA upgrade HVSU2 or HVSU HVSI to electronic telephones External Options Note Refer to Chapter 5 Station Apparatus to connect electronic telephones including the following upgrades HVSU2 or HVSU HVSI for O...

Page 145: ...elephones HVSU2 Upgrade Installation Install the HVSU2 in accordance with the following steps 1 Loosen the four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 5 1 and remove the base Position the HVSU2 on the standoffs inside the base and secure with the two provided screws Figure 5 12 3 Connect the HVSU2 wire plug to the P2 connector on the printed circuit board PCB in the telephone Figure 5 1...

Page 146: ... to connect the HHEU in an electronic telephone to the HESB Refer to Chapter 6 Peripheral Installation for HESB installationprocedures TO P2 HVSU CONNECTOR ON MAIN PCB INSIDE P5 TELEPHONE HSVl R L DK0073 Figure 5 14 HVSI HVSU Installation for ElectronicTelephones 4 All HHEU versions and types except for V l HHEU1 are compatible with the Speaker Off hook Call Announce upgrades HVSU2and HVSU HVSI HH...

Page 147: ...unction with P10 P20 P40 and P60h 1O pin connector 3 terminaljumper Interfaceconnector for optional Off hook Call Announce subassembly connector used in conjunction with P10 P20 P40 and P50 Sets ring generator voltage levelfor circuits 1 and 2 H 19OV P P factorysetting L 130v P P White jumper wire 1 When cut configures PESU circuit 5 for installationof an optional HDCB P P position is used if devi...

Page 148: ...es the RCOS circuits provide the same options as the RCOU The RCOU also provides ring detection dial outpulsing and hold circuitry Each r RCOS CONNECTORS RCOU line can be programmedfor DTMFor dial pulse signaling Each RCOU RCOS circuit has gas tube secondary protection RCOU controls indicators and interface connectors are shown in Figure 4 23 and described in Table 4 16 RCOS controls indicators an...

Page 149: ...tch SW401 RCOS Connector Pl 1 RCOS Connector P12 2 position slide switch 1O pin male connector Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 4 Interface connector for RCOS 4 circuit loop start CO line unit Interface connector for RCOS 4 circuit loop start CO line unit Interface connector for RCOS 4 circuit loop start CO line unit Interface connector for RCOS 4 circuit loop start CO line unit 1...

Page 150: ... unless RCOS is connected to a CO RCOU Connector J14 Female connector 3ED LEDs AA qfq 8765 JACK CIRCUITS JACK CIRCUITS J13 d RCOU CONNECTORS f i J14 I J4 J3 3 0 B swaoi 3 0 r3 SW701 RCOU CONNECTORS SW601 Figure 4 24 RCOS Controls Indicators and Interface Connectors 4 34 January 1996 ...

Page 151: ...nterconnecting details 4 9 4 RCOU Programming Overview The following programming parameters may be specified for the RCOU along with RCOS January 1996 4 35 Program 03 Specify Code 11 for each slot that will support an a four circuit RCOU without an RCOS Specify Code 17 for each slot that will support an RCOU equipped with an RCOS Note Program 03 can be skipped and Program 91 can be run instead Pro...

Page 152: ...otective packaging Note The decibel dB PAD switches SW10 1 through S W40 1 control excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to a CO or PBX telephone office by providing a 3 db signal level drop to or from the PBX or CO when set to the 3 position Switches are factory set to the 0 0 dB signal level drop position 2 If the KSU is located within one mile of the PBX or CO telephone office set d...

Page 153: ...ts to indicate CO line circuit 4 is in operation Indicator CD412 Note CO line indicator will not light unless PCOU is connected to a CO Jl Connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and 2 J2 Connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 3 and 4 PAD Switch SW 101 2 position slide Enables 3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit 1 PAD Switch SW201 ...

Page 154: ...ntral Office when set to the 3 position Switches are factory set to the 0 Odb signal level drop position 2 If the DK280 cabinets DKSUB280 and DKSUE280 or DKSUE424 are within one mile of the PBX or Central Office set the db PAD switches SW101 SW201 SW301 and SW401 to the 3 3db signal level drop position 3 Set each line for Ground Start GND or Loop Start LOOP by setting the following jumper plugs SW...

Page 155: ...LOOP GND Jumper SW1 03 LOOP GND Jumper SW203 LOOP GND Jumper SW303 LOOP GND Jumper SW403 Modular connector RJ14 modular Interface connector for trunk circuits 1 and 2 Modular connector RJ14 modular interface connector for trunk circuits 3 and 4 2 position slide switch Enables 3dB signal level drop for line circuit 1 2 position slide switch Enables 3dB signal level drop for line circuit 2 2 positio...

Page 156: ... m3 w 4 12 2 PEMU REMU Installation Procedures Install the PEMU or REMU in accordance with the following steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Remove the PCB from its protective packaging Determine if the E M tie lines will be configured for 2 or 4 wire transmission on PEMU Set the 2W 4W jumper plugs P103 P203 P303 and P403 to the appropriate positions on REMU set SW103 m sw403 For the PEMUl only Set the FG jumper ...

Page 157: ...AD Switch SW301 2 position slide switch Enables 3dB signal level drop for line Circuit 3 PAD Switch SW401 2 position slide switch Enables 3dB signal level drop for line Circuit 4 TYPl TYP2 Jumper Plugs P102 104 3 terminal jumper plugs Enables line Circuit 1 to be set for Type 1or Type 2 signaling TYPl TYP2 Jumper Plugs P202 204 3 terminal jumper plugs Enables line Circuit 2 to be set for Type 1 or...

Page 158: ...ons for any of the cabinet PCBs Program 03 can be skipped and Program 91 can be run instead Program 04 Specifies PDNs These are also the numbers that must be received by incoming tie lines to route calls to the proper telephones see Program 17 LED 05 Program IO I Allows or denies Two line Conference GROUND BATTERY JUMPERS FLAEcATvoEdvN POSITIONS Program 15 Assigns tandem connections and Dial Pulse...

Page 159: ...ation for tie line 1 must be in BAT position per FCC requirements M lead origination for tie line 1 must be in BAT position per FCC requirements M lead origination for tie line 2 must be in BAT position per FCC requirements GND BAT Jumper P202 Three terminal jumper GND BAT Jumper P301 Three terminal jumper GND BAT Jumper P302 Three terminal jumper M lead origination for tie line 2 must be in BAT p...

Page 160: ...of the PBX or CO telephone office set dB PAD switches SW101 through SW401 to the 3 3 dB signal level drop position Note Ensure the RDDU s component side is facing right when installing it in the KSU 3 Sensitivity jumpers PlOl P401 are used mostly for dial pulse operation to adjust for dial pulsing at different loop lengths If close to the Central Office the sensitivity should be set for low L as t...

Page 161: ...ifferent loop lengths DK0296 3 position slide switch Pad Switch SW101 Pad Switch SW201 3 position slide switch Pad Switch SW301 3 position slide switch Pad Switch SW401 3 position slide switch Modular Connector Jl Connector J2 Connector Modular Connector DID Line Circuit 1 Indicator 1 CD122 Red LED Top DID Line Circuit 2 Indicator 2 CD222 Red LED DID Line Circuit 3 Indicator 3 CD322 Red LED Red LE...

Page 162: ...Program 17 LED 05 3 RDTU DID lines can route per Program 09 assignments or Program 71 and 72 DNIS assignments see Program 17 LED 05 Use system programming to select the number of channels supported by the RDTU and to assign line operation for the individual channels The RDTU requires installation of a customer provided Channel Service Unit CSU Refer to Chapter 1l T1 Interface for CSU installation ...

Page 163: ...terminal jumper plug Sets RDTU for Remote Loop Back Jumper Plug mode test procedure Pi and P2 Loop back 3 terminal jumper plug Sets RDTU for self check or Jumper Plug NetworkKSU loop back check See Tl section for more information about RDTU switches jumper options and indicators DK0285 REMOTE LOOP BACK MODE SWITCH NOTUSED BACKPLANE CONNECTOR I I EQUALIZER SETTING SWITCH 1 FFLON LON Pl OFF 01 P3 LL...

Page 164: ...ecommendations 5 After installing the RDTU gently pull the PCB outward If the connectors are properly mated a slight resistance will be felt 4 14 3 RDTU Wiring Refer to Chapter 1l T1 Interface or RDTU wiring diagram in Chapter 7 Wiring Diagrams for wiring interconnecting details 4 14 4 RDTU Programming Overview The following programming parameters may be specified for the RDTU Program 03 Specify C...

Page 165: ...nstallation Section 6 12 PIOU controls indicators and interface connectors are shown in Figure 4 32 and described in Table 4 24 PIOUS information is provided in Figure 4 33 and Table 4 25 4 15 1 PIOU and PIOUS Hardware Options The PIOU and PIOUS support the following hardware options Internal Option n Remote Maintenance Modem Unit IMDU Install the IMDU on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB in accordance with t...

Page 166: ... N O N C 3 terminal jumper plug Alarm sensor normally open or normally closed Jumper Plug P12 jumper plug CCITT BELL Jumper Plug P13 3 terminal jumper plug IMDU or external modem operating specification jumper plug SMDR Baud Rate Switch SW1 2 position slide switch Selects baud rate 300 or 1200 bps for SMDR printer or call accounting device TTY Baud Rate Switch SW2 e position locking push Selects b...

Page 167: ...ting device Selects baud rate 300 or 1200 bps for Remote Maintenance Modem piggy back module IMDU or external TTY jack ModemmY Switch SW3 Two position slide switch Enables PIOUS for operation with IMDU modem or TTY jack Most modems in USA require BELL specification W4 not factory installed DK0288 l Top modular is TTY and bottom modular is SMDR MNOT FACTORY INSTALLED FOR MODEM SPECIFICATION ti OPTI...

Page 168: ...s 3 After installing the PIOU or PIOUS gently pull the PCB outward If the connectors are properly mated a slight resistance will be felt 4 15 3 PIOU and PIOUS Wiring Refer to Chapter 6 Peripheral Installation and Chapter 7 Wiring Diagrams for PIOU and PIOUS wiring interconnecting details 4 15 4 PIOU and PIOUS Programming Overview The following programming parameters may be specified for the PIOU a...

Page 169: ...olume of built in 3 watt amplifier BACKPLANE CONNECTOR 50 PIN AMPHENOL CONNECTOR FEMALE Figure 4 34 PEPU Controls Indicators and Interface Connectors n External paging 600 ohm duplex interface one zone n MOH Control or Night Relay Control Note Refer to Peripheral Equipment Installation Chapter 6 Peripheral Installation and Wiring Diagrams Chapter 7 Wiring Diagrams for installation of external opti...

Page 170: ...t support attendant consoles RATU controls and indicators are illustrated in Figure 4 35 and described in Table 4 27 4 54 January 1996 4 17 1 RATU Installation Procedure Install the RATU in accordance with thefollowing steps 1 2 3 Remove the RATU from its protective packaging Note Ensure the RATU s component side is facing right when installing it in the KSU Insert the RATU into the slot following...

Page 171: ...ting The LED will turn OFF when the console is operational see note Lights when a PC or conventional Console 3 is not operating The LED will turn OFF when the console is operational see note Lights when a PC or conventional Console 4 is not operating The LED will turn OFF when the console is operational see note Note The LED will flash temporarily when the console is first installed and the DK280 ...

Page 172: ...D circuits are numbered automatically in numerical order starting with the RCIlJ RCIS installed in the lowest slot number Slots with code 81 will increment the Caller ID circuit numbers by eight circuits even if RCIS is not installed on RCIU Program 50 Assigns CO lines that will receive Caller ID to an associated RCIU RCIS Caller ID circuit number This assignment is flexible i e any RCOU RCOS PCOU...

Page 173: ...JlO Jll Figure 4 36 RCIU RCIS PCB Installation t Protectori I I A I 4 wire Modular Jack 4 I I T2 Tl RI R2 Not Used1 Not Used1 DK0293 Figure 4 37 RCIU RCIS PCB Modular Jack Positions DKOP92 January 1996 4 57 ...

Page 174: ...01 Off if the OA port should not send Caller ID ANl H Turn LED 02 on if the off port should send DNIS information H Turn LED 02 off if the OA port should not send DNIS information Notes 1 Program 77 4 allows LED 01 and LED 02 to be turned On simultaneously to allow CLID ANI and DNIS information to be sent from the OA port on ACD calls 2 The system will initialize with LED 01 and LED 02 ILOW i e no...

Page 175: ...an still be installed with all of their respective paging modem and RS 232 port functions available however five RS 232 modern ports can be installed in one DK280 system When installed together in the same DK280 system the RSIU PIOU PIOUS RSSU port functions are identified and enabled turned On Off in system programming If the same function is programmed for an RSIU port and a PIOU PIOUS RSSU port...

Page 176: ...I a r I Pll I a r m I PO w I i i I PI __ ___ I 52 r l BOTTOM VIEW solder side RMDS Top View RSIS Top View RMDSlA 1 TOSHIBA A i 53 Do not connect telephone circuit Tip Ring to 54 See Note 2 TOSHIBA 53 52 52 1 1 17 17 OK0294 Notes 1 Maximum of one RMDS per RSIU maximum of three RSIS per RSIU 2 On RMDS J4 is not used for modem operation it is used when RMDS is confiqured for 77 Y SMDI SMDR or MIS ope...

Page 177: ...lot 13 The programming telephone will then be on the 6th circuit port 005 or 013 until Program 03 Code 49 is set for slot 11 of the PDKU in slot 12 6 Connect all PCB connectors that were removed back into the same PCBs they were removed from in Step 3 7 Turn the system power on and note that the programming telephone is on port 13 and all other ports are shifted up by eight ports Program slot 11 w...

Page 178: ... power off 5 seconds and on or run Program 91 2 to transfer Program 03 data from temporary to working memory At this time the programming telephone changes from port 13 to port 005 and all other ports shift down by eight ports n Assigns each installed RSIU port to operate at a specified transmission rate Where X identifies the RSIU Port No l 4 see Figure 3 for RSIU port number configuration and Z ...

Page 179: ...ocol should be used When the system is initialized the Bell 212A standard is set LED 15 Off Program 77 4 LED OWLED 02 n Enables CLID ANI and or DNIS information for ACD calls to be sent from the RSIU OA port n Turn LED 01 On if the OA port should send CLID and or ANI information for ACD calls n Turn LED 02 On if the OA port should send DNIS information for ACD calls Notes 1 Program 77 4 allows LED...

Page 180: ...4 64 January 1996 ...

Page 181: ...es consist of four models the EKT6510 H EKT651 O S EKT6520 H and EKT6520 SD n Standard Telephones 500 and 2500 type standard telephones apply whenever standard telephones are mentioned in this manual 5 2 Telephone Installation This section describes the wiring required to connect telephones to the system Before installing any telephone wiring read the following warning and caution notes 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 182: ... Unit PEKU and the Standard Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PESU via the main distribution frame MDF with standard twisted pair jacketed telephone cable Two pair wiring as a minimum is required for telephone connection However three pair wiring is recommended to permit future upgrades such as Off hook Call Announce To accommodate the electronic telephone line cord the cable should be terminate...

Page 183: ...phones with headsets can only be wall mounted with an HHEU2 1 Loosen the captive screws and remove the telephone base Figure 5 l 2 Using a suitable cutter remove the handset hanger from the base Figure 5 l Insert the handset hanger in the slot provided on the front of the telephone Figure 5 2 The hanger fits in the notch on the handset cradle 3 Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it t...

Page 184: ...ms In the data communications mode data calls can be manually dialed with a Data Call button and disconnected with a Data Release button on the telephone or data and voice calls can be dialed from the keyboard of the terminal or PC using standard AT commands Digital telephones may also be assigned a Modem button to reserve a modem or monitor modem availability and status Assign feature buttons to ...

Page 185: ...gure 5 4 or 5 5 RS 232 FEMALE TELEPHONE TOP ASSEMBLY Figure 5 4 RPCI DI or PDIU DI2 Installation Into 2000 Series Digital Telephone RS 232 FEMALE DB 25 CONNECTOR TELEPHONE T OP ASSEMBLY TO P2 OF BOTTOM PCB IMPORTANT DO NOT CONNECT DIU CABLES TO HHEU CONNECTOR DIRECTORY TRAY General Notes l A IOOO SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE CANNOT SUPPORTAN HHElJ AND A PDIU DI AT THE SAME TIME IOOO SERIES TELEPHONES ...

Page 186: ...he four captive screws securing the telephone base Figure 5 1 and remove the base 2 Loosen the four captive screws securing the metal plate to the standoffs inside the base where the DVSU will be installed Figure 5 6 Remove the plate which can be discarded 3 Position the DVSU PCB on the standoffs Figure 5 6 and secure with the four provided screws 4 If installing the DVSU into a 2000series digital...

Page 187: ... i 1 DKoo67 Figure 5 8 DKT201 O SD DKT20204 and DKT2020 SD Strap and Connector Locations 1020SD ROOM NOISE SWITCH EX SP STRAP W204 1020H W305 1020SD DK0068 WIRE bvsu Figure 5 9 1 OOO Series Digital Telephone Strap and Connector Locations January 1996 5 7 ...

Page 188: ...rades are automatically set for the headset loud bell application 4 Connect the HESC 65A cable to P601 of the HHEU both HHEUlA versions and the HHEU2 have P601 if the Loud Ringing Bell option is required Figure 5 11 Refer to Chapter 6 Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures 5 For the V 3 HHEUl If only the headset is connected to the HHEU cut both sides of the R607 resistor Figure ...

Page 189: ...l the telephone connected to the HESB and adjust the volume control on the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the telephone For 1OOO series digital telephones refer to Figure 5 9 and cut the carbon straps W301 and W302 on the DKTl020 SD W201 and W203 on the DKTl020 H 3 Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws 5 3 6 Beep Strap 5 3 5 Carbon Headset Handset...

Page 190: ... on steady when using the speakerphone 5 3 8 Busy Override and Camp on Ring Tone Over Handset Headset Option The busy override and camp on ring tones can be sent over the telephone handset or headset in addition to the speaker with 2000 series digital telephones The tones only sound over the speaker with lOOO series digital telephones Perform the following procedure to have these tones sent over t...

Page 191: ... the electronic telephone PCB Figure 5 l 3 Cut the HHEU strap on the telephone PCB Figure 5 13 Note The HHEU strap must be replaced if the HHEU PCB is removed from the telephone Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws 10 To adjust the volume of the HESB loud ringing bell call the telephone connected to the HESB and adjust the volume control on both the back of the H...

Page 192: ...hone and cut it Figure 5 l 3 3 Reinstall the telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws 5 5 Direct Station Selection DSS Console System Connection Strata DK280 systems configured with RCTUA can support up to three DSS consoles RCTUB up to four DSS consoles and systems with the RCTUC D up to eight consoles There are two types of consoles the DDSS console and the HDSS console T...

Page 193: ...tandard two pair twisted jacketed telephone cable To accommodate the connection the instrument end of the HDSS console cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block RJ ii Refer to Chapter 7 Wiring Diagrams for wiring interconnecting details If using 24 AWG cable the overall length of the cable run from the Expansion Unit KSU to the HDSS console must not exceed 500 feet 152 meters...

Page 194: ...d side on the DDCB or HDCB Figure 5 16 2 Remove the side cover from the DDCB or HDCB to expose the two left hand mounting holes Figure 5 16 3 Position the DDCB or HDCB adjacent to the key service unit KSU with regard to wiring needs 4 Secure the DDCB or HDCB to the mounting surface with four one inch panhead wood screws 5 6 3 MDFB Wall Mounting Mount MDFBs to a wall or vertical surface in accordan...

Page 195: ...ctory Number DN will flash on telephones assigned in Program 79 5 7 Digital Add on Module Installation The DADM provides DSS buttons Figure 5 19 speed dial buttons and CO line buttons see Figure 5 19 for initialized button assignments Install one or two DADM 2020s to a 2000 series digital telephone only The number of DADMs allowed depends on the common control PCB installed RCTUA 12 DADMs RCTUB 40...

Page 196: ...DED WITH DADM DADM CABLE SUPPLIED WITH DADM FIRST DADM ER CONNECTOR 2000 SERIES w v Pl OF BOTTOM PCB DIGITAL TELEPHONE PHONE DADM2020 DADM2020 2000 SERIES DKT _ DKOO 1 Figure 5 l 8 Digital Add on Module Installation 5 18 1 ...

Page 197: ...igure 5 19 DK280 Digital Add on Module s Button Assignments General Notes l If only one Digital Add on Module is connected to the telephone then the button assignments are the same as those shown on the first DADM l For RCTUA 1 or 3 XX indicates the speed dial numbers assigned to keys in place of 232 239 There are only 32 stations on RCTUA processors DK0078 January 1996 5 19 ...

Page 198: ...nsole only requires 1 pair The maximum distance from the DK280KSU to either attendant console is 1000 feet 303 m See Chapter 7 Wiring Diagrams for Attendant Console wiring loop length and secondary protection requirements Notes 7 Attendant console cable runs must not have the following l Cable splits single or double l Cable bridges of any length l High resistance or faulty cable splices 2 See Cha...

Page 199: ...e Delay ring assignments do not apply to DID lines Program 09 Assigns the user s company s main listed Directory Number DN last four digits to the attendant console if DID lines should ring the console If the DID lines are assigned to ring multiple Attendant Console ports in Programs 81 89 DID calls will be distributed between the consoles Only one console any one should be assigned with the main ...

Page 200: ...ected party will be monitored or recorded The record level output from the attendant handset or headset is approximately 3 dB below the connected party record level 4 AUX IN can be used to send audio to the attendant and connected party The audio level to the attendant is approximately 10 dB below the audio level sent to the connected patty Audio sent to the outside party is limited to 15d5v CO Ti...

Page 201: ...wer is restored each telephone is independently reconnected to the system after that telephone is finished with its direct CO line call The DPFT is normally installed on the Main Distribution Frame MDF Figure 6 1 provides a circuit diagram of the DPFT Power Failure Emergency Transfer Installation Install the DPFT in accordance with the following steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Mount the DPFT on or near the MD...

Page 202: ... DETECTOR 1 I I I I TO RCOUIPCOU Tl I 4 Jl 27 c a Ji 26 I I Ji 2 TO RCOUIPCOU RI 4 I Jl I I I General Notes l Representation of first of eight circuits l Conditions shown with AC power 24VDC off Figure 6 1 DPFT Circuit Diagram I RELAY I I ITO TEL T1 I I 1TO TEL R1 I I I I I I I I 1TO CO T1 I TO CO RI 6 2 January 1996 ...

Page 203: ...lay contact specifications are as follows If using the MOH control feature with a PIOU or PEPU set PIOU or PEPU jumper plug Pll to the MAKE or BREAK position as required 1 MAKE M Shorts the normally open contacts pins 9 and 34 when MOH is activated n BREAK B Opens the normally closed contacts pins 9 and 34 when MOH is activated n BGM or MOH Source Specifications Input Impedance 600 ohms or 8 ohms ...

Page 204: ... CO LINE AND STATION PCBs DID LINES TIE LINES CO LINES LOOP CO LINES GND STATIONS 1 DIGITAL AND STATION PCBs ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE I LSPEAKERS DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE BGM DIAL CODE 481 ON 480 OFF OR Tel Set Music BGM NHT NHR IF USING PIOUS PIOUIPEPU PIOUS SPO 6OOQ SW4 OPTIONAL PAGE OUTPUT SWITCH 600 OR 3 WATT 8Q MOH OR k NIGHT TRANSFER I OPTIONAL EXTERNAL PAGE BGM OUTPUTS I SPEAKER EXTERNA...

Page 205: ... PEPU MOH BGM SOURCE SHARED 600 Q O l VOLT RMS DK0304 Figure 6 3 Music Source Configuration A W Configuration C three music sources This configuration allows the MOH source to be connected to the RCA Jack of the RCTU as in Configuration A The digital or electronic telephone BGM source is connected to a PEKU PESU RSTU RSTU2 RDSU or PSTU PCB as in Configuration B and a separate BGM source is sent to...

Page 206: ...IC DIGITAL TELEPHONE SPEAKER I BGM 481 ON 480 OFF ISOLATION TRANSFORMER UNIVERSITY SOUND MODEL TM 2 RCA JACK OR EQUIVALENT RSTU RSTU2 BGM MUSIC RDSU OR TIP 28 n HIGH LEVEL SOURCE PSTU INPUT RING 3 g l OUTPUT 6OOQ OUTPUT CKT 2 OR 8s1 OUTPUT PHONE LINE SEE PROGRAM 19 FOR SLOT ASSIGNMENT BGM SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS Note l INPUT IMPEDANCE 600 OR 8 ohms 1 UNIVERSITY SOUND l INPUT VOLTAGE 10500 W Reno Ave...

Page 207: ...ERNALSPEAKER BGM SOURCE i4 v f BGM PAGE j I I 63 I f 1 I I I 1 I RSTU RDSU I PSTU PESU r OR PEKU __ __ i I ELECTRONIC DIGITAL TELEPHONE SPEAKER BGM 481 ON 480 OFF ZONE RELAYS ACTIVATE WITH PAGE BACKPLANE WIRING INSTALLATION WIRING c Notes 1 An isolation transformer may be required if connecting BGM source to a standard telephone port 2 Program 19 assigns BGM Slot number Figure 6 6 Alternate Music ...

Page 208: ...STU RDSU or PSTU to a customer supplied isolation transformer and BGM source per Figure 6 5 Note The isolation transformer protects the BGM source from potentially damaging RSTU RDSU or PSTU voltage Some music sources which are designed for telephone system applications may have this protection built in and do not require the transformer Consult the documentation provided with the music source If ...

Page 209: ...rectly to 12OVAC power source Note Refer to the Programming Part in this manual as necessary when instructed to program the PIOU PIOUS or PEPU in the following paragraphs 1 A ER w SPEAKER 8 OHM SPEAKER TAPE MC BELL 1 TO MUSIC ON HOLD INPUT ON RCTU PCB DK0308 6 3 1 External Page Door Lock Relay Options with PIOU PIOUS or PEPU The DET DER may be programmed for either the external page function or th...

Page 210: ...ns must be 24 A WG twisted pairs l Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections where applicable do not connect both options simultaneously RELAY OPTIONS Kl DE DOOR LOCK OR AMP MUTE CONTROL PROGRAM 77 1 LED 07 K2 NH NIGHT RELAY OR MUSIC ON HOLD CONTROL PROGRAM 77 1 LED 05 l Ki K2 24VDC 1 AMP MAXIMUM Figure 6 8 PIOUS Relay Control Functional Wiring Diagram 6 10 January 1996 ...

Page 211: ... jumper Wi on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position as required n MAKE Shorts the normally open contacts DET and DER when external page is activated n BREAK Opens the normally closed contacts DET and DER when external page is activated 3 Refer to Figures 6 7 or 6 8 for wiring interconnecting details Connect the PIOU PIOUS or PEPU to the MDF as required for the external paging function Door lock ...

Page 212: ... and RCTUC D or three with RCTUA DDCBs connect only to digital circuits always Circuit 5 on a PDKU or RDSU associated with ports 004 012 020 and 028 HDCBs connect only to electronic circuits always circuit 5 on a PEKU or PESU associated with ports 004 012 020 and 028 It is important to note that each DDCB HDCB door lock control reduces the maximum door phone capacity by one Configure each DDCB HDC...

Page 213: ...rams and follow these steps 1 Cut jumper W9 of the particular PEKU or PESU that will connect to the HDCB 2 Connect the Circuit 5 VT VR and DT DR pairs to the HDCB HKSU modular jack 3 Connect the door lock wire pair to the HDCB modular B jack pins 3 and 4 4 On the HDCB set SW1 to the DOOR position 5 On the HDCB set SW2 to the LOCK position 7 6 9 W3 inside the HDCB can be set to open or close the do...

Page 214: ... three seconds OFF for a night bell when incoming CO lines ring NT1 tenant 1 CO lines NT4 tenant 4 CO lines per Program 15 and 77 3 When configured for the MOH function with Program 77 1 the relay activates any time a CO line is on hold In this configuration the relay is normally used to control the MOH source NHT Control Configure the PIOU PIOUS or PEPU for the NHT function in accordance with the...

Page 215: ... hold 3 Refer to Figures 6 7 and 6 8 for wiring interconnecting details Connect the PIOU PIOUS or PEPU to the MDF as required for the MOH Relay function 6 4 External Speaker Unit HESB Options Strata DK280 systems provide three options utilizing an HESB loud Ringing Bell Option The loud ringing bell option allows the voice first or ringing signal tone to be amplified without the use of other manufa...

Page 216: ...n for Electronic Telephone Figure 6 12 1 On the HESB TBl terminal block connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7 and connect another jumper between terminals 5 and 8 2 3 On the HESB TB2 terminal block connect a jumper between terminals 4 and 5 Notes 1 HESB connections made in Steps 3 6 may be accomplished using the HESB VOICE modular jack instead of the TBI terminal block 2 Install an HHEU PCB a...

Page 217: ... A I I PT PR f JACKETED TWISTED PAIR 24 AWG PDKU CKT 1 8 OR RDSU CKT 5 8 HESC 65A CABLE OCA STRAP R607 General Note l See Chapter 5 Statior for instructions to cut HHEU jumpers on telephone main PCB 1 DO NOT CUT HHEU V 3 or 4 a I 1 L HHEU CIRCUIT V 3 or 4 r INSTALi OR HHEU2 CARD INTO BASE OF DKT PER HHEU INSTALLATION INFORMATION IN CHAPTER 5 STATION APPARATUS 1000 OR 2000 SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONE ...

Page 218: ...AIR FROM ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE TO HESB VOICE TIP I I 1II r I IT 7 VOICE RING PEKU CKT 1 8 OR PESU CKT 5 8 JACKETED TWISTED PAIR 24 AWG OCA TIP 123456 r l r l 123456 General Note l See Chapter 5 Station Apparatus for instructions on how to cut the HHEU strap inside the telephone I I HESC 65 or c HESC 65A CABLE GREEN RED DO NOT CUT INSTALL HHEU CIRCUIT TELEPHONE CARD INTO BASE OF 6500 SERIES ELECTRON...

Page 219: ... Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block Connect terminal 7 of the HESB TBl terminal block to Pin Ll of the MDFB 5 Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TBI terminal block to Pin L2 of the MDFB 6 If using a PIOU or PEPU connect the PIOU or PEPU 600 ohm page output Pins 13 and 38 to terminals 3 and ...

Page 220: ...JUMPER WIRES TBl TB2 1 2 3 4 5 8 5 6 6 7 INTERNAL WIRING TBI F VOICE 3v 3 4 4 General Note l The 600 ohm page output sends three types of signals during system operation l Voice page l Background music l Night ringing VOLUME CONTROL c J MODULAR CONNECTOR 12345678910 MAY BE USED VOICE DOOR PHONE 12v ov 123456 12v ow u Y VDC JUMPERS L HESB REAR VIEW DK0315 n I POWER SUPPLY 117VAC TO 12 VDC Figure 6 ...

Page 221: ...Q 1 SPT 38 BK GN 1 125 25 PAIR CABLE 66 BLOCK JUMPER WIRES I TBl TB2 l 2 3 4 5 6 INTERNAL WIRING TBI VOICE 4 4 3 3 TBI I_ DOOR PHONE 7 4 8 3 9 2 lo 5 24 AWG CONNECTOR 12345678910 MAY BE USED VOICE DOOR PHONE 12v ov 123456 v L J L J1 12v ov JUMPERS HESB REAR VIEW DK0316 HACU 120 General Note l The 600 ohm duplex page output is 117VACTO12VDC compatible with most commercially available talkback ampli...

Page 222: ... any of the paging BGM options The PEPU and PIOUS will support only the paging with BGM same amplifier no zone page option 6 5 2 External Page Option Installation All paging connections are made via the PIOU or PEPU amphenol connectors or the PIOUS TBI terminal to the Main Distribution Frame MDF Page single zone with BGM same amplifier In this configuration paging and BGM are amplified by a common...

Page 223: ...US PEPU PIOU Relav DKT LCD Display Kl zone 1 35 External Paging A K2 zone 2 36 External Paging B K3 zone 3 37 External Paging C K4 zone 4 38 External Paging D All zones 39 EXT ALL CALL PAGE Note Multi zone page output rating iS 30 W maximum at 300 ohms An all zone page code 39 is also available as an option see Program 10 2 When the All Page code is dialed all four relays are activated to permit s...

Page 224: ...PIN NUMBERS j 25 PAIR CABLE BGM MUSIC SOURCE TO EXTERNAL SPEAKER ONLY General Notes MUSIC AMP DK0319 l See Programs 78 1 I5 and 77 3 for Night Ringing CO line and Tenant l 4 assignment options l Dial intercom 59 to pick up night ringing CO lines 9 The PIOU with the lowest Program 03 code 4I 42 or 43 will provide the External Page and Night Ring options Figure 6 17 PIOU Zone Page BGM Night Ring Sep...

Page 225: ...ru Tenant 4 that will night ring over PIOU external page zones Program 15 Assigns CO lines to Tenant 1 thru Tenant 4 Lines are initialized as Tenant 1 RCTUA and RCTUB provides two tenants RCTUC D provides four Program 77 3 Assigns Tenant 1 thru Tenant 4 CO lines to night ring specific PIOU external page zones Program 39 Assigns appropriate Night Transfer and Tenant Pick up for Tenant or Non Tenant...

Page 226: ... ZONE 3 37 J A aZONE 4 C 36 ALL ZONES C 39 C PIOU PIN NUMBERS 25 PAIR CABLES General Notes l See Programs 78 1 15 and 77 3 for Night Ringing CO line and Tenant i 4 zone assignment options l Dial Intercom 59 to pick up night ringing CO lines l The PIOU with the lowest Program 03 code 41 42 or 43 will provide the External Page and Night Ring options I Figure 6 l 8 PIOU Zone Paging and Night Ringing ...

Page 227: ...3 ON 14 A 025 cKT2 B 026 cKT3 A 033 cKT2 LED 04 ON 15 B 034 cKT3 l Program 1O l LED 19 and 20 ON l Program 15 5 enable appropriate CO lines for tandem connection l Program 78 2 enable appropriate CO lines if amplified DISA is required l Program 10 2 LED 18 and 19 ON General Notes Amplifier l All amplifier equipment is customer or dealel supplied l Use a P way telephone CO line amplifier that is FC...

Page 228: ...ld be ON if it is certain that an amplifier will always be available for two CO line conference connections four maximum simultaneously If this LED is ON and a two CO line connection is established without an external amplifier the Strata DK280 station may be unbalanced and receive a hum noise LED 19 provides additional station amplification when external amplifiers are switched into two CO line c...

Page 229: ...r transfer must be 1 or IO seconds minimum to generate a call record printout t can be set to 1 0 or IO seconds using Program 60 2 2 MSS designates a Direct Inward System Access DISA or External Call Forward CO call to a station that is not answered or answered after I or IO seconds per Program 60 2 The call will register as a normal incoming call if answered before the threshold time 1 0 or 10 se...

Page 230: ...rintout A prints after disconnect at 4 59 Printout A Release 1 and 2 003 MSS 04 59 00 00 32 00 06 Printout A Release 3 and above 003 MSS 04 59 00 00 25 00 05 Example 2 DISA Internal Station Call Call Sequence B n Outside caller rings CO line 003 CO line 003 is programmed as a DISA line n Line 003 returns intercom dial tone to caller after two ring cycles 5 6 seconds n Caller dials 203 W After 48 s...

Page 231: ...NIS ANI Format i I Caller ID Number or ID Code 7 7145833730 3846 j I 1 Outgoing Calls 1 20 digits i __ _ __________ __ ____ _ _ ___ A I _ _ _ __ _ _ ___I D S i q DNIS NAME5 0 16 characters Caller ID NAME5 0 16 characters i Field Number 65 80 3 i I or I Account Code6 4 15 digits l_ _ _ l_ __ __ 1 I _ _ _______ _ t 1 Call Duration incoming outgoing or transfer must be 1 or IO seconds minimum to gene...

Page 232: ...001 DISA 12 24 00 04 57 incoming 003 DISA 12 24 00 04 57 outgoing Note The MSS entry will print out on y if the call was connected after the SMDR threshold 1 0 or 10 seconds The threshold is set in Program 60 2 System Program Data Printout If a printer is connected to the SMDR port customer program information stored in the RCTU RAM may be printed out for reference by using Program 97 see Subsecti...

Page 233: ...nterface cable and the PPTC or PPTCS adapter from the PIOU PIOUS RSIU or RSIS SMDR port to the SMDR printer or call accounting device DB2 5 or DB9 connector Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW1 switch to the appropriate bps rate 300 or 1200 bps as determined by the baud rate of the printer or call accounting device Program 76 set RSIU RSIS bps rate Set the printer or call accounting device to 8 bits no parit...

Page 234: ...sconnect D Tone The Strata DK280 stations will send a disconnect tone to Toshiba VP or Stratagy when the station hangs up while connected to Toshiba VP or Stratagy D Tone is also sent to release the Toshiba VP or 0825 or DB9 Plug 3 pair Modular Cord ft max Modu ar h Jack DK280 Modularized PPTClA 5M 25 pin or PPTCS RS232 Modular Adaptor DATA FORMAT l ASCII l g bits l No parity l 7 stop bit g pin l ...

Page 235: ...r AR signal of some Central Offices COs is not reliable and may occur during a CO line voice connection causing the call to disconnect If this occurs disable CPC AR Hold and CPC AR Voice Mail calls on all CO loop start lines with Programs 15 O and 15 3 W B Tone Signals Stations send a recall B tone to Toshiba VP or Stratagy whenever VP or Stratagy answers a transfer camp on recall from stations th...

Page 236: ...Note The RRCS 4 8 or 12 must be installed on the RCTU to allow End to End Signaling H Receive Auto Call Forward ID Codes Provides auto digits from call forwarded stations to direct callers to station mailboxes All VM ports should be set to receive auto ID code Program 31 LED 16 Voice Mail Program Checklist The following items should be verified before programming voice mail 1 Set Toshiba VP Mainte...

Page 237: ...et per customer requirements Programs 16 40 41 45 48 and 50 56 Verifies that outgoing CO line access is allowed on VM ports to allow the VM beeper notification feature to operate 6 8 5 Voice Mail System Installation Install the voice mail VM system in accordance with the following steps 1 2 3 4 5 Ensure that the RSTU RDSU RSTS PSTU or PESU PCB is installed in the system per Chapter 4 Printed Circu...

Page 238: ...ata transmission speed is set by the first AT command that the RPCI or DIU receives once it is in the command state if manual dialing or receiving calls in the auto answer default mode the transmission speed is transparent IMPORTANT To use the RPCI DI PDIU DI or PDIU DS with AT commands communications software or a PC program that performs terminal emulation must be used AT commands cannot be issu...

Page 239: ...ata RD Pin 3 The DCE device transmits data to the DTE device on the RD lead EIA circuit BB the DTE receives data on the RD Request to Send RTS Pin 4 Some DTE devices send an RTS signal EIA circuit CA to the DCE device when they are ready to transmit data on the TD lead If the DTE device does not generate the RTS signal the DIU DIP switch SW1 4 should be set ON to inform the RPCI or DIU Sometimes t...

Page 240: ...I DI or PDIU DI or PDIU DS configured as a DCE sends the Ring Indicate RI signal to the computer to tell the computer DTE that the RPCI or PDIU is receiving an incoming call SWl 3 should be ON for the DIU to send RI steady and OFF to send at one second ON three seconds OFF intervals SW1 4 This switch is placed in the ON position if the computer does not output the RTS signal or when connected to a...

Page 241: ...or RPCI DI or PDIU DI ports LED 05 Should be ON if the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex that uses access codes to make external calls or to insert a pause following RPCI DIU access of an outside line LED 10 Enables Caller ID and ANI information to be sent from RCPI DI to the connected PC LED 11 Enables DNIS information to be sent from the RCPI DI to the connected PC LEDs 17 20 Used to e...

Page 242: ...rinters q n n LED 04 Should always be ON for PDIU DS ports LED 05 Should be OFF for PDIU DS ports connected to printers LEDs 17 w 20 Data security groups can be used to allow or deny digital telephones equipped with PDIU Dls access to PDIU DS ports connected to a printer DIU stations can only make data calls to DlUs in the same data security group 7 Program 22 should be used to configure PDIU DSs ...

Page 243: ...tation wiring to RSTU RSTU2 RDSlYRSTS PSTU or PESU is in Chapter 7 Wiring PORTABLE PC 1 RS 232 KT RPCI DI or PORTABLE PC 2 RS 2 STRATA DK280 KSU MDF DIAL UP COMPUTER SERVICE El EDLlnhlE 1 RS 232 TLs m0wm L LINE X dDF3 co cLINE 1 ISTANDARD TELEPHONE TELEPHONE MoDEM POOL MDF3 I PORTABLE PC3 Figure 6 25 DK280 Data Communications Installation Example Block Diagram January 1996 6 43 ...

Page 244: ...nnector DB9 of PC or Toshiba Portable Rear view of RPCI DI or PDIU DI DB25 RS 232 female connector FEMALE CONNECTOR PC modem style serial DB25 to DB9 RS 232 cable Pin to pin connections are confiqured as a straight cable not as a null modem cable 50 ft max 24AWG customer supplied General Notes l Some 175 232 E A leads may be called by other names by some manufacturers l The computer receives data ...

Page 245: ... connector DB25 MALE CONNECTOR i e i e e e e l l l l l I 5 l eeeeeeeeeee l 20 22 KY Genera Note The PC ASCII terminal receives data on Pin 3 RD and transmits data on Pin 2 To Rear view of RPCI DI or PDIU DI DB25 RS 232 female connector DB25 FEMALE CONNECTOR 1 NAME 8 8 3 3 20 1 DTR 1 20 RS 232 CABLE 7 1 SG 1 7 6 1 DSR I 6 4 1 RTS 1 4 5 1 CTS I 5 22 1 RI I 22 I 1 1 1 FG 1 1 Figure 6 27 DK280 RPCI DI...

Page 246: ...R SG DCD DTR RI Rear view of printer General Notes l The printer receives data on Pin 3 RD and transmits data on Pin 2 TO l The PDIU DS should be in the connect to DTE mode Pl P9 are strapped A B so that it transmits data on Pin 3 170 and receives data on Pin 2 TO DB25 DB25 PIN NAME PIN 8 DCD 8 3 RD 3 2 TD 2 20 DTR 20 7 SG 7 6 DSR 6 4 RTS 4 N C CTS 5 N C RI 22 1 FG 1 50 ft max 24 AWG customer supp...

Page 247: ...4 AWG customer supplied For PDIU DS port DK280 Program 20 LEDs 01 02 04 17 On All other LEDs Off Note 1 In Program 20 for the PDIU DS port LED 02 should be set ON after the AT commands shown above are sent to the modem General Notes l Modem receives data on pin 2 TO and transmits data on pin 3 RD The PDIU DS must be in the connect to modem mode Pl P9 strapped B C so that it transmits data on pin 2...

Page 248: ...R TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER TYPE A MODULAR CORD 50 ft max 24AWG TYPE 2 MODULAR ADAPTER Note 1 See Figure 6 31 for detaiiedpin out information of modular cords and adapters General Notes l Never use modular cords and adapters when connecting a RPCI DI PDIU DUPDIU DS to a modem l Connection examples 1 and 2 work when using the RPCI DI or PDIU DI to make calls with personal computer applications auto di...

Page 249: ... RJ45 TO DB25 FEMALE ADAPTER 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 N C RJ45 CTS SG DTR TD DCD RD RTS DSR RI LEAD NAME 5 7 20 2 8 3 4 6 22 DB25 RJ45 STRAIGHT THROUGH FRONT 1 1 FRONT TYPE A 3 3 RJ45 FLAT MODULAR 4 4 CORD STRAIGHT x f 7 7 1 8 iI i 8 1 RJ45 CROSS PINNING FRONT FRONT TYPE B i if RJ45 FLAT MODULAR v CORD CROSSED 2 X x 1 8 i 2 1 1 18 Modular Cords 50 ft max 24AWG customer supplied Figure 6 31 DK280 RPCI Dl PD...

Page 250: ... Note DK0334 1 Do not cut the Perception strap when installing a PDIU DS in Strata DK systems General Notes l Mode select PI P9 A B if PDIU DS is connected to a terminal type device DTE l Mode select Pl P9 B C if PDIU DS is connected to a modem type device DCE l See Figure 6 34 to disassemble assemble PDIU DS l Some RS 232 leads go by different names depending on the equipment manufacturer I MODUL...

Page 251: ... AT Cl SWl 4 must be ON l If using Toshiba Personal Computers and Toshiba Printers using X ON x OFF flow control set SWl 4 ON on PDIU Dls and DSs l SWi 2 should be off when PDIU DS is connected to a modem SWITCH FUNCTION INITIAL POSITION SW1 1 Forced hang up when DIU does not detect space signal on TD or RD for about 8 to 9 minutes OFF ON enable auto disconnect 1 OFF disable SW1 2 DCD DSR control ...

Page 252: ...PDIU DS ports connected to modems enabling the use of AT commands and result codes when incoming calls are made from outside the system to modems connected to PDIU DSs LED 03 Should be set ON for PDIU DS ports connected to modems LED 04 Should always be ON for PDIU DS ports LED 05 Should be OFF if the system is installed behind a PBX Centrex that uses access codes to place outgoing trunk calls LED...

Page 253: ...nce with the following steps Subsection 6 9 8 paragraphs 2 6 provide tests for five RCPI DIU data call applications These test routines only check the data communications mode of the RPCI DI they do not check the RPCI DI API mode The telephone and port numbers used in these figures are provided for explanation purposes only when actually testing use port and telephone numbers appropriate for the s...

Page 254: ...TE MODEM JUMPER PLUGS Jumper wire is for Perception applications only See Table 7 4 regarding external power requirements Figure 6 34 DK280 PDIU DS Disassembly Assembly Diagram v DK0336 6 54 January 1996 ...

Page 255: ...ard Set NUIII Lock to ON and type 240 while holding the Alt key down this is HEX FO If in the data communication mode ATCO will switch the RPCI DI back to the API mode n From PC l s keyboard type ATDD 01 and press Enter AT commands must be capital letters The data call LEDs will be lit on DKT 200 and 201 PC 1 displays CONNECT xxxx PC 2 displays RING PC 1 and PC 2 are connected as shown by the thic...

Page 256: ...lly accomplished using the DOS MODE commands n To connect the PC to the printer press the DKT s Data Call button and dial 2 0 3 The CONNECT on the PDIU DS will be lit The connection between the PC and the printer is completed as shown by the thick lines above PDIU DS 203 is in the communication mode If busy tone is sent to the DKT the connection is not complete press Data Release and try Step 4 ag...

Page 257: ...tons should be provided Default settings for PDIU DI and PDIU DS S Registers W Make sure PC 1 and PC 2 are on line with a communications software package and that the communication parameters of each PC and communication software package are set to the same values data transmission rate parity data bits stop bits flow control etc Note If using an RPCI DI it may be necessary to switch the RPCI from...

Page 258: ...ther LEDs OFF Program 20 Port 004 LEDs 01 02 04 and 17 ON all other LEDs OFF Program 39 Port 000 Data Call 456 and Data Release 454 buttons should be provided Internal modem set the following AT commands Auto answer ATS0 1 disable character echo in the command state ATEIZI modem returns result codes ATQIZI presence of data carrier AT Cl hang up and assume command state with DTR on to off transitio...

Page 259: ...ype ATDD OO and press The PC screen displavs OK Enter AT commands must be capital letters this prompts PDIU DS 204 to dial and connect to PDIU DI 200 The CONNECT LED on the PDIU DS 204 B Type ATH from the PC keyboard used in Step A PC l s and PC 2 s screens both display NO CARRIER will be lit the Data Call LED on DKT 200 will also be lit The DATA and MODEM LEDs on DKT 200 will turn off The screens...

Page 260: ... data communications mode from the PC keyboard Set hum Lock to ON and type 240 while holding the Alt key down this is HEX FO If in the data communication mode PORTABLE PC 2 MDF ATCO will switch the RPCI DI back to the API mode n Make sure that a dialing directory consisting of names and telephone numbers you wish to auto dial is installed within the application software include the appropriate Str...

Page 261: ...1 To detect a closed condition set P12 to the N O position 4 To detect an open condition set P12 to the N C position Jumper W3 on the PIOUS is used to set the alarm sensor to detect an open or closed condition from the facility alarm system Solder the W3 jumper wire as follows refer to Figure 6 40 H To detect a closed condition solder W3 to the normal open position n To detect an open condition so...

Page 262: ...econdary announcement where it will receive a new announcement and the same or additional dialing options Some customers may not configure their Auto Attendant system with a Sequence C The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed to an alternate station s assigned in system programming ringing assignments Sequence D The call is not answered after being tra...

Page 263: ...ANSWERED AND IS ROUTED BACK TO THE PRIMARY ANNOUNCEMENT C D DK0343 Program 23 As many as four digital announcement devices for primary announcements each requiring one standard telephone station port Figure 6 42 can be assigned Callers receive primary announcements 60 seconds maximum announcement time which consist of the greeting along with the delivery of menu prompts when they first call they m...

Page 264: ...destination it could be a secondary announcement device or alternative stations per program 10 3 LED 18 If a station has Call Forward set the call will forward to the proper destination instead of routing per AA Program 1O 3 LED 18 Program 1O 3 n LED 18 Some customers may choose to configure their Auto Attendant without a secondary n n announcement device In these arrangements transferred calls th...

Page 265: ...vide automatic release if the calling party disconnects without waiting for the safeguard timer in Program 1O 3 6 11 3 Built in Auto Attendant Installation The built in Auto Attendant feature only requires the installation of a feature key and customer supplied announcement devices to deliver announcements to callers The feature does not require the installation of any other devices Install the cu...

Page 266: ...must recognize a 100 milliseconds open circuit on the RSTU RSTU2 PDSU RSTS loop and hang up when it detects the open on the loop 6 11 6 Built in Auto Attendant Block Diagram A detailed block diagram which includes call flow patterns and associated programs is provided in Figures 6 44 and 6 45 6 11 7 Non Built In Auto Attendant Overview Some customers may not utilize the Strata DK280 built in Auto ...

Page 267: ...pter 7 Wiring Diagrams for RSTU PSTU PESU and RDSU RSTS PCB standard telephone circuit interconnecting wiring details 8 12 Multiple PIOU PIOUS RSSU RSIU Installation This installation is for Remote Maintenance MIS for ACD SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary RS 232 VM Integration and Open Architecture Port Up to three PIOU PIOUS or RSSU PCBs can be installed in a system to simultaneously provide maintenanc...

Page 268: ...60 SECONDS MAXIMUM RRCS REMAINS 4 SECONDS A2 A2 SECONDARY AFTER ANNDUNCEMENT DISCONNECTS ANNOUNCEMENT DEVICE S DK0347 Figure 6 45 Built in Auto Attendant Flowchart continued SMDR relay control alarm sensor and door lock RSIU RSIS RMDS is installed Program 76 functions will be active only on the PIOU or PIOUS assignments will override Program 03 Code 41 42 PCB which is assigned the lowest Program 0...

Page 269: ...ETARY FOR VM INTERFACE PROGRAM 03 CODE 433 Note 1 Install PIOU PIOUS or RSSU PCBs in the last highest numbered slot in any cabinet s 2 SMDR Page Outputs Relay controls Alarm Sensor and other miscellaneous options on PIOU or PIOUS will be active on the installed PlOWPIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code 4 1 42 or 43 RSSU does not provide these features 3 If set RSIWRSIS Program 7...

Page 270: ...r for SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary n Program 31 LED 04 09 15 16 17 and 18 for SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary RS 232 n Program 32 assign the lowest RSTU port connected to the voice mail system to all station ports using voice mail This is the same port assigned in Program 13 This assignment is used in place of VM groups Program 31 which are assigned when not using SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary VM integra...

Page 271: ...port e g COMl COM2 Click OK rarity None 0 Odd 0 Even 0 Mark 0 Space Connector 0 Parity Check 0 CaLrier Detect 5 From the Phone pull down menu select Hangup 6 If after a few moments ATH followed by OK appears the selected COM port is either the RPCI or a modem At the cursor prompt type ATC0 If the RPCI DI is connected to the selected COM port the RPCI DI returns a continuous stream of data To stop ...

Page 272: ... and check the RPCI connections 6 14 2 Install the DKT Service Provider IMPORTANT TAPI must be installed on the PC prior to installing the DKT Service Provider 1 From the Windows Program Manager double click the Main group icon Eile Options Window Help pJ i zFJ Accessories Toshiba Manager 2 The Main group window opens Double click the Control Panel icon i wr PIF Editor Read Me Sysedit MS DOS Promp...

Page 273: ...ect the following H COM port I Phone Name n Phone Type 10 Keys or 20 Keys n Switch Type Strata DK 8 16 96 or Strata DK280 When finished selecting click the Configure Keys button 10 Select the Intercom button Click the two OK buttons then two Close buttons Installation is complete Note More information is available in the Help files throughout the remainder of the Service Provider installation proc...

Page 274: ...January 1996 ...

Page 275: ...Telephone Voice Mail DPFT to RSTU PSTU PSTU2 Figure 7 8 RSTU PSTU Station MDF Cross Connect Record Figure 7 9 PESU Wiring Diagram Figure 7 lo PESU Station MDF Cross Connect Record Figure 7 21 MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones DKTs and DDSS Console to PDKU Figure 7 22 MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones with PDIU DI and PDIU DS to PDKU Figure 7 23 PDKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record Figure 7 24 MDF...

Page 276: ...signations Station Line Connection 7 1 4 Option Interface PCBs n Figure 7 17 MDF Wiring PIOU or_ PEPU Peripherals 25pair n Figure 7 18 PIOU TTY and SMDR Wiring n Figure 7 l 9 PIOUS Page Relay Alarm Connections n Figure 7 20 PIOUS SMDR TTY Options and Wiring n Figure 7 37 Multiple PIOU PIOUS Remote Maintenance MIS for ACD RS 232 Voice Mail Integration n Figure 7 38 RSIU RSIS RMDS Wiring Diagrams 7 ...

Page 277: ... ckt 5 40 ohms 1000 ft 303 m 2 pair HDSS consoles PEKU ckts 7 8 Standard RSTU ckts 1 8 telephones RDSWRSTS ckts 1 4 voice mail PSTU ckts 1 8 auto attendant or etc PESU ckts 1 2 20 ohms l 300 ohms 4 l 600 ohms l 1 200 ohms 500 ft 152 m l 300 ohms Approx 3000 ft 909 m l 600 ohms Approx 9000 ft 2 727 m l 1200 ohms Approx 21 000 ft 6 363 m with 150 ohm device See manufacturer s product specifications ...

Page 278: ...ped with the 48 volt loop option PCB R48S OL 13A OL 13B or OL 13C may be used for OPS connection I 2 When ordering DS IfTl circuits six items must be specified a The number of channels per TI circuit fractional increments are normally 8 12 or 16 channels full service is 24 channels Unused channels must be bit stuffed b The type of CO line assigned to each channel loop start ground start tie Wink o...

Page 279: ... 303 m Not Available Notes lx0004 1 Battery backup applies to instances when the system is being powered by batteries exclusively 2 See Figure 7 26 for external power wiring General Notes l Digital telephones and other digital devices can operate at maximum lengths with two pair wiring or an external power source l Digital cable runs must not have the following I l Cable splits single or double l ...

Page 280: ...tate secondary protectors must be installed if there is outside wiring Figure 7 l and on all DID and E M tie lines These protectors which contain fast semiconductors in addition to fuses shall comply with the requirements for secondary protectors for communication circuits UL 497A Care must be taken to ensure that they are very well grounded to a reliable earth ground Recommended protectors are av...

Page 281: ...A the 6500 series electronic telephone must have an HVSlJ2 or the combined HVSI and HVSU installed l Program 31 button LED 03 must be on for electronic telephone to receive OCA l An HHEU must be installed inside 6500 series electronic telephones for headset or HESB Loud Ringing Bell option l All cable 24 A WG max 40 ohm loop resistance from PEKU to electronic telephone 1000 ft GN V 1 23 NOT USED 6...

Page 282: ... ELEr n n b Iri IYIb TEL1 EPHONE ASS AIITI mm29 j VOICE PAIR NOT USED 1 7132 II AL OCA Tl xl 34 OCA Rl x J 35 7 36 1CIRCUIT 2 II137 II 38 1CIRCUIT 3 39_ iG l 7 m 1CIRCUIT 4 i ONLY IF ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE RECEIVES OFF HOOK CALLS i _I CIRCUIT 5 CIRCUITS 7 8 T R I I I I I I PAIR ORDER MUST BE 2345 1 CIRCUIT 6 WIRED AS SHOWN I I ClRCUlT7 Genera Note Place PEKU SW1 to HDSS 1CIRCUIT 8 1NOT USED SW1 Gene...

Page 283: ... C I I See Note 1 c I See Note 2 MDFB DOOR PHONE STATION s PORT A B C 004 I 151 I 152 153 See Note3 ii2 I 154 155 156 1 020 157 158 159 028 161 162 163 Notes 1 On PEKU or PESU cut W9 See Programs 39 77 1 77 2 and 79 2 HDCB B output options S Wl Always in DOOR position SW2 DOOR position B connects to door phone LOCK position 8 connects to door lock 3 Door phones may be connected to Circuit 5 on Por...

Page 284: ...tes ELECTRONIC A separate BGM source is available Proaram 10 2 button LED 09 on for CIRCUIT 7 TO ELECTRONIC BGG connection Program 19 for slot assignment Cut W5 jumper on PEKU Provide BGM to external page with PIOU PIOUS PEPU Volume is adjusted at BGM source only not at PEKU EELECTRONIC TELEPHONES THAT RECEIVE OCA Y BR 1 44 1 I 1 CIRCUIT 3 TO ELECTRONIC TELEPHONES 1 Eli NOT USED 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK...

Page 285: ...r 2 Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected see Programs 10 Z and 19 BGM connects to VT and VR Circuit 3 only DT and DR not used 3 Indicate if electronic telephone or HDCB allowed HDCB port numbers 004 012 020 028 4 Indicate if electronic telephone or HDSS Console number 1 M8 General Note l For future use make as many copies of this form as needed prior to entering any information Fig...

Page 286: ...ate BGM source can be connecter to Circuit 2 of RSTU or PSTU An isolation transformer may be required when connecting BGM to RSTU or PSTU see Chapter 6 Peripheral Installation Subsection 6 2 4 General Notes l See Table 7 2 for loop requirements l Two ringers maximum USED DPFT POWER FAILURE TRANSFER BOX Jl Jl 24 VOLTS J1 25 vv 1 zqr1r 50 I 24v 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK DKOOl 1 Figure 7 7 MDF Wiring Standa...

Page 287: ...d Color CKT Port Intercom Code Designation Number Number Number Device Standard Telephone Electronic Telephone Location W BI T BI W R w o NOT USED 1 o w NOT USED W G T G W R Note 1 W Br NOT USED 2 Br W NOT USED w s T s w R R BI NOT USED 3 BI R NOT USED R O T O R R R G NOT USED 4 G R NOT USED R Br T Br R R R S NOT USED 5 S R NOT USED Bk BI T BI Bk R Bk 0 NOT USED 6 0 Bk NOT USED Bk G T G Bk R Bk Br...

Page 288: ... H HIGH LEVEL 19OV P P II OCATl OT 5 1 m OCA Rl OR 5 mTFi l OT OR CIRCUIT 6 F OT OR CIRCUIT 7 OT OR CIRCUIT 8 Note 1 HDSS connection is not available with PESU HDCB may be connected to Circuit 5 BGM to Circuit 8 General Notes Electronic telephone Circuits 5 8 To receive OCA the 6500 series electronic telephone must have an HVSUZ or the combined HVSl and HVSlJ incfall rl J NOT USED Program 31 butto...

Page 289: ...VR Bk Br DT 7 Br Bk DR Bk S VT Notes 2 and 3 S Bk VR 8 Y BI DT BI Y DR Notes 1 Indicate if HDCB or electronic telephone 2 HDSS Console number 1 8 is not allowed 3 Indicate if BGM or electronic telephone is connected BGM connects to VJ and VR Circuit 8 only DT and DR not used General Notes l For future use make as many copies of this form as needed prior to entering any information l Indicate if st...

Page 290: ...RIDGING 2345 r l TELCO PROVIDED MODULAR BLOCK 1 625 TYPE OR EQUIVALENT MODULAR MODULAR CORD CORD 1 1 SAME PCOU PIN OUT NETWORK JACK RJ14C FIC 02LS2 DK0015 Figure 7 l 1 MDF Wiring CO Lines to PCOU 7 16 January 1996 ...

Page 291: ... 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK Figure 7 12 MDF Wiring 2 wire Tie Line to PEMU MODULAR CORD NOT USED SAME SAME TELCO PROVIDED MODULAR BLOCK 625 TYPE OR EQUIVALENT PEMU PEMU PIN OUT NETWORK JACK RJ2EX FIC TLI 1M DK0016 January 1996 7 17 ...

Page 292: ... 625 TYPE OR EQUIVALENT E W PEMU RE 4 654321 Figure 7 13 MDF Wiring four wire Tie Line to PEMU MODULAR CORD 123456 r l c i i AME 6E 5 Rl 7 2 Tl 1 M El SAME TR 2 Ti 1M L 2 2 Tl lM1 1 NETWORK JACK RJ2GX PEMU FIC TL31 M PIN OUT DK0017 7 18 January 1996 ...

Page 293: ...LOT NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 1 36 1 I 37 I 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 DK0018 Figure 7 14 CO Line RCOU RCOS RCLU RDDU PEMU REMU RDDU RDTU MDF Cross Connect Record January 1996 7 19 ...

Page 294: ...R vv RING CO 5 TIP PCOU RCOU 5 RIN PCOU RCOU 5 6 l m Bi il _ Ifi T TIP CO I I I I BI Bk R RING CC V 17T Rk Cl T TIP PC3 N I RCf M I Ic I T I TIP cn Y BI T TIP PCC _ BI Y R RING PCOU RC 42 Y O SPARE R 18T R 17 O Y SPARE 43 Y G SPARE 18 G Y SPARE SPARE I SPARE 1 V sl 1 SPARE I I R 21 1 BI V I SPARE 22T R 23T R 24T R 25T R 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 7 i v o o v V G G V V Br Br V v s R V SPARE SPARE SPARE S...

Page 295: ... RING TEL 3 T TIP PSTU I RSTUIRSTS 3 R RING PST1 LJ RSTU RSTS 3 T TIP TEL R RING TEL T TIP PSTU RSTU RSTS R RING PSTU RSTU RSTS 20T 45 I Y S I SPARE I R I S Y I 20 SPARE I I I 1 Br Y 1 I R 21T 46 V BI SPARE R 21 BI V SPARE 22T 47 v o SPARE R 22 o v SPARE 23T 48 V G SPARE R 23 G V SPARE 24T 49 V Br SPARE R 24 Br V SPARE 25T 50 v s SPARE R 25 s v SPARE Figure 7 I 6 DPFT Connector J2 Terminal Sequenc...

Page 296: ...21 22 BREAK NH T 34 R Br 17 NH R 9 Br R 18 MDF 66M BLOCK PIN 30 29 38 37 42 41 13 14 25 26 49 54 _ _ 46 SELECT RELAY FUNCTION MDF WITH PROGRAM 77 l CONNECTIONS NIGHT RELAY OR ALL WIRES SHOULD MOH CONTROL BE JACKETED 24 AWG TWISTED PAIRS Figure 7 l 7 MDF Wiring PIOU or PEPU Peripherals 25 Pair MULTI ZONE PAGE 30W MAX COMPOSITE IMPEDANCE 300 OHMS 0 D ZONE 38 ALL ZONE PAGE NW I I I TAPE PLAYER r h BA...

Page 297: ... PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS for IMDU or TTYjack LED CO4 On 300 BPS S W2 set in LED CO4 Of 1200 BPS S W2 set Our S W3 Sets the PlOlJ to operate with the IMDlJ or an external device connected to the 77 Y modular jack STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING PORT PIOU MODULAR PIN OUT MODEM For IMUU operation TTY For ASCII terminal or external modem rr I c rw uu I P13 Sets the IMDU and l7Y j...

Page 298: ...ctions must be 24 A WG twisted pairs l Dotted lines show optional connections only one optional connection is allowed RELAY OPTIONS l Kl DE DOOR LOCK OR AMP MUTE CONTROL PROGRAM 77 1 LED 07 l K2 NH NIGHT RELAY OR MUSIC ON HOLD CONTROL PROGRAM 77 1 LED 05 l Ki K2 24 VDC 1 AMP MAXIMUM DK0023 Figure 7 19 PIOUS Page Relay Alarm Connections 7 24 January 1996 ...

Page 299: ...0 or 1200 BPS PIOU MODULAR PIN OUT S W2 Sets the PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS for IMDU or TTY jack LED CO4 On 300 BPS SW2 set ln LED CO4 Off 1200 BPS SW2 set Out SW3 Sets the PIOU to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular jack MODEM For IMDU operation TTY For ASCII terminal or external modem PPTC PIN OUT iTY IMDU 6 PIN MODULAR JACK SMDR 6 PIN MODUL...

Page 300: ...H OR WI JT PDIU DI SEE NOTE 1 INOT USED CORD DDSS CONSOLE CIRCUIT 8 ONLY OR DIGITAL TELEPHONE 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK Note 1 T R wires are always required PT Pf are additional power wires required only for long station runs per Tab e 7 4 PT PR may be used with normal station runs also General Note Voltage eve s T PT 26 3 27 8 VDC R PR 0 0 VDC GND Reference to SG ground Figure 7 21 MDF Wiring for Digita...

Page 301: ... required only for long station runs per Table 7 4 PT PR may be used with normal station runs also 2 US 232 cable length is max 50 ft with 24 A WG wire General Notes Voltage levels T PT 26 3 27 8 VDC R PR 0 0 VDC GND Reference to SG ground l D Us can be connected to Circuits I 7 on y if connected to PDKUI or Circuits 1 8 on PDKtJ2 v PDIU DS Figure 7 22 MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones with PDIU D...

Page 302: ... T R PWR T PWR R T R PWR T PWR R CKT Port Intercom Digital Telephone Number Number Number Device Location 2 5 DK0027 Note 1 DDCBs connect only to Circuit 5 Ports 004 012 020 and 028 General Notes l For future use make as many copies of this form as needed prior to entering any information l Indicate if PDIU DS digital telephone with or without PDIU DI DDSS console number 1 8 or DDCB is connected F...

Page 303: ...d be FCC Registered from Part 68 CIRCUIT 6 TO EKT EKT CIRCUIT 7 TO OR DSS CIRCUIT 8 TO EKT OR DSS OCATl OT OCA Rl OR CIRCUIT 2 SYSTEM PROGRAMS l Program 10 3 circuit assignments IPROGRAM 10 3 PEKU SLOT PEKU PORT PEKU BUlTON LED POSITION I I NUMBER CIRCUIT LED 01 ON 2nd A 009 1 CKT2 B OlO LED 02 ON 3rd LED 03 ON 4th LED 04 ON 5th A 017 B O18 cKl3 A 025 CKT2 B O26 cKT3 A 033 cKT2 B 034 CKT3 CIRCUIT ...

Page 304: ...oR PHONE C I I I See Note 1 c J MDFB DOOR PHONE STATION s NOT USED PORT A B C 004 151 152 153 See Note 2 012 154 155 156 020 157 158 159 Notes 028 161 162 163 1 DDCB B outout opf ons l SWl Always in DOOh position l SW2 DOOR position B connects to door phone LOCK position 5 connects to door lock 2 Door phones may be connected to circuit 5 on ports 04 012 020 and 028 only Genera Note See Table 7 4 f...

Page 305: ...AC IN 120VDC lO DC OUT 24 VDC 10 160 MA MIN DC CURRENT 200 MV P P MAX AC RIPPLE ON DC OUTPUT AC DC power supplies that meet the above requirements are available from most telephone equipment supply houses DIGITAL 1000 OR 2000 SERIES TELEPHONE WITH OR WITHOUT PDIU DI OR DDSS DDCB PDIU DS EXTERNAL POWER STRAPS If the external power is installed cut the external power straps located inside the digita...

Page 306: ...e 7 27 MDF Wiring CO lines to RCLU or PCOU TELCO PROVIDED MODULAR BLOCK 625 TYPE OR EQUIVALENT L L r MODULAR CORD c r T 2T27 I PCOU PIN OUT U or PCOU 0 if4 1 8 2 0 l NETWORK JACK RJ14C FIC 02LS2 DK0031 7 32 January 1996 ...

Page 307: ...LE SEE NOTES BLACK T 26 N RED R 1 WHITE Tl 27 _r GREEN Rl 2 TRANSMIT RDTU PCB RECEIVE L RDTU AMPHENOL 655 FEET MAXIMUM b General Notes l Pins 2 and 4 of the DB 15 connector in most CSUs are frame ground No connection is required NDTU cable is supplied with RDTU PCB 30 ft maximum l Set RDTlJ SW1 switch for proper loop length per TVDS I section Customer supplied span cables must be 22 A WG ABAM cabl...

Page 308: ...ORK JACK 4 SAME PINOUT AS LINE I TO NETWORK JACK 4 SAME PINOUT AS LINE I 1 TO NETWORK JACK V USOC RJI CX LEAD PIN SB 8 M 7 SG 6 T 5 R 4 E 3 4WRl 2 4wT1 1 LINE 4 LINE 3 LINE 2 LINE I DK0033 Figure 7 29 MDF Wiring REMU 2 4 Wire Type l II 7 34 January 1996 ...

Page 309: ...ure 7 30 MDF Wiring CO to RCOU RCOS TELCO PROVIDED MODULAR BLOCK 625 TYPE OR EQUIVALENT 2345 r l L C A MODULAR CORD 5R8 z SAME 4 R7 P rn 3 T7 w 2T8 SAME SAME DK0034 7 8 NETWORK JACK RJ14C FIC 02LS2 RCOU RCOS January 1996 7 35 ...

Page 310: ...6 OR PDIU DS 25 T7 26 R7 PT7 CIRCUIT 7 TO DKT 7 28 PFi7 OR PDIU DS 29 I T8 VOICE DATA n GND R8 VOICE DATA I e u pI_ K U w_E I NOT USED 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK DG 24V General Note l Alternate BGM source can be connected to circuit 2 of RDSU see Chapter 6 Peripheral Installation Subsection 6 2 4 Figure 7 31 RDSU Wiring m I I I I I MODUL CORD AR DIGITAL TELEPHONE DK0035 7 36 January 1996 ...

Page 311: ...icate if separate BGM source connected to circuit 2 2 DDCBs connect only to Circuit 5 Ports 004 012 020 and 028 General Notes l For future use make as many copies of this form as needed prior to entering any information l lndica te if standard telephone voice mail port etc DKCO36 F igure 7 32 RDSU Station MDF Cross Connect Record January 1996 7 37 ...

Page 312: ...NETWORK Figure 7 33 MDF Wiring DID CO Lines to RDDU 2345 r 7 DK0037 TELCO PROVIDED MODULAR BLOCK 625 TYPE OR EQUIVALENT I I MODULAR CORD SAME RDDU PIN OUT NETWORK JACK RJ14C FIC RDDU 7 38 January 1996 ...

Page 313: ...le MDF Wiring Diagram IPRl 2 PAIR MODULAR CORD NOT USED g WIRE CABLE RJll MODULAR RS 232C CONNECTOR TO 12a ATTENDANT CONSOLE l Notes 1 Console must be wired with P pair wiring maximum distance from KSU RTAU PCB is 7 000 feet 303 m 2 EGA monitor or EL display require local AC power 3 Attendant console cable runs must not have the following Cable splits single or double Cable bridges of any length H...

Page 314: ...29 I 30 EEE 0 31 0 32 A f I I I 34 0 0 BE33 35 36 n IJ7 BR Y 1 19 E bj c itiE AUDIO PLUGS FUTURE USE RATI REAR CONNECTIONS 7 7 7 ix 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK Notes 1 RATI is wired with l pair wiring maximum distance from KSU RTAU PCB is 7 000 feet 303 m 2 Personal Computer Attendant Console and CRT require local AC power 3 Attendant console cable runs must not have the following Cable splits single or do...

Page 315: ...ybarpart number AA 104A 4 could be used in place of the two modularjacks or a T connector such as graybar part number 267A2 Adaptor could be used as shown below 2 Assign RCIWRCIS circuits to the appropriate CO line using Program SO TELCO JACKS I 4 WIRE INSTALLER CROSS CONNECT CUSTOMER SUPPLIED MODULAR JACKS MODULAR I I NETWORK i RCOU 4 WIRE MODULAR CORD RCIUIRCIS 4 WIRE MODULAR CORD RJ14C RJl4C RJ...

Page 316: ...OGRAM 03 CORD CODE 433 Notes 1 Install PIOU PIOUS or RSSU PC in the last highest numbered slot in any cabinet s 2 SMDR Page Outputs Relay controls Alarm Sensor and other miscellaneous options on PIOU or PIOUS will be active on the installed PlOWPIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code 47 42 or 43 RSSU does not provide these features 3 If set RSIWRSIS Program 76 will override Progra...

Page 317: ...ic v i X E aM Notes CAUTION 1 The RSIU can be configured with up to three RSIS or two RSIS and Do not plug CO line or RSTU tip ring into one RMDS in any position Use Program 76 to set RMDS or RSIU modular jack RSIU RSIS RMDS port types 2 All RSIlJ RSIS RMDS ports are system programmable to allow up to four of any of the functions SMDR MIS SMDI OA TTY and remote modem 3 When the RMDS is used as a m...

Page 318: ...DS Modular Adaptor Pin Configuration Figure 7 38 RSIU RSIS RMDS Wiring Diagrams continued Note 1 PPTC must be modified to connect to a modem Refer to DK280 Installation and Maintenance Manual Chapter 13 for modification of PPTC General Notes PPTC will not connect directly into a 25 pin personal computer COM port because they are male gender PPTCS is designed to connect directly to a personal compu...

Page 319: ...ing the System for Programming 8 4 8 4 General Programming Guidelines 8 5 8 4 1 After lnitiaiization 8 5 Chapter 9 Record Sheet Instructions 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 initialization and Test Programs 9 l Basic System Records 9 2 Toil Restriction 9 39 9 3 1 Toll Restriction Methods 9 39 9 3 2 Toil Restriction Features 9 39 9 3 3 Completing the Toll Restriction System Record 9 40 Least Cost Routing 9 47 9...

Page 320: ...nments l O 24 Program 09 DID Digit Translation Assignments Logical Ports 000 119 l O 25 Program 09 DID Digit Translation Assignments Logical Ports 120 m245 I O 26 Program 09 DID Digit Translation PhDN Reference Ports 500 w 619 l O 27 Program 09 DID Digit Translation PhDN Reference 620 739 l O 28 Program 09 Distributed Hunt Group DID Extension Number Translations 1O 29 Program 1O l System Assignmen...

Page 321: ...r Assignments R3 I o 75 Program 39 Alert Signal Button Assignments R3 lO 77 Program 39 Flexible Button Assignment for Ports to IO 79 Program 40 Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments IO 81 m Program 41 l Ti Span Frame and Coding Assignments 1O 83 Program 41 2 Ti Channel Assignments IO 84 Program 41 3 Tl Span Transmit Send Level Pad Assignments I O 85 Program 41 4 Ti Span Receive Level Pad Assig...

Page 322: ...ine Assignment Record Sheet DNIS Address 460 499 R3 1o 1 17 Program 71 w 73 DN to DN Tie to DN and DID to DN Ringing Assignments 000 010 R3 IO 118 Program 71 u 73 DN to DN Tie to DN and DID to DN Ringing Assignments 01 1 w 041 R3 1O l 19 Program 71 m 73 DN to DN Tie to DN and DID to DN Ringing Assignments 042 072 R3 1O 120 Program 71 w 73 DN to DN Tie to DN and DID to DN Ringing Assignments 073 10...

Page 323: ...tory Number Button LED Flash Assignments 073 w 144 R3 1o 1 53 Program 93 CO Line Identification 1O l 56 Program 97 Printing Program Data Through SMDR IO 158 Program 40 Station CO Line Access 1O l 60 Program 41 Station Outgoing Call Restriction l O 161 Program 42 0 CO Line to PBX Centrex Connection Lines 1 w 80 l O l 62 Program 42 0 CO Line to PBX Centrex Connection Lines 81 N 144 l O l 63 Program ...

Page 324: ...Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code 13 m 16 RCTUC D Only lO 19 6 Program 53 LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plan No 1 and 2 I O 197 Program 53 LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plan No 3 and 4 lo 198 Program 53 LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plan No 5 and 6 lo 199 Program 53 LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plan No 7 and 8 I O 200 Program 53 LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plan No 9 and 10 ...

Page 325: ...gram O3 Flexible PCB Slot Assignments I4 Program 00 Part 1 Software Check Remote Maintenance Security Code Assignments 8 15 Program 04 Station Logical Port Primary Directory Intercom or Number Assignment 8 17 Flexible Button Codes for Digital and Electronic Telephones I O 72 Directory Number Programming Codes 1o 75 Directory Number Programming 1O 76 Console only Buttons and Codes 1o 93 Incoming Li...

Page 326: ... February 1996 ...

Page 327: ...8 29 l w 29 8 10 2 DSS DKT EKT 28 DTMF and Dial Pulse Assignments O l 15 30 39 DTMF Receiver RRCS Operation 03 12 15 DTMF Signal Time CO lines 80 l 60 ms l O l DTMF Signal Time VM Ports 80 l 60 ms 1O 2 DTMF Tone No Tone Padded Tone Return I O 2 DTMF Continuous Tone 2000 series DKT 35 Feature or Topic Program Number Account Codes 15 70 39 69 30 60 ACD See ACD I M Manual Add on Module 29 ADMIN 280 7...

Page 328: ... Pooled Line LED No Flash 31 Port Station Number Assignment 04 Privacy Non Privacy 31 30 39 Privacy Override l O 2 30 31 RAM Test see Memory Test OO Part 2 X February 1996 Feature or Topic Program Number Redial Last Number 39 Remote Administration and Maintenance OO 03 09 77 1 78 Repeat Last Number Dialed 39 Ring Transfer I O 1 37 Ringing Repeat 1O l Ring Tones 80 Ring Flash Assignments 71 73 81 8...

Page 329: ...Assignments Basic System Station Logical Port Intercom or Primary Directory Number Assignment Basic System Phantom Directory Number PhDN Assignments and Distributed Hunt Group Directory Numbers for Internal and Tie Line Calls Basic Sys tern Flexible Access Code Numbering Basic System 05 09 09 1o 1 1o 2 1o 3 1o 4 11 12 13 14 O Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing Basic System Built in Auto Attendan...

Page 330: ... System Assign CO Line Groups Dial 9 or 801 816 Basic System 23 24 25 1 26 27 28 20 21 22 17 DID Tie Line Options Basic System 17 DID Intercept Port Number Basic Sys tern 18 ACD See ACD I M Manual Basic System 19 Alternate Background Music BGM Source Slot Assignment Basic System Computer Interface Unit and Data Interface Unit Corifiguration Basic System Modem Pool Port Assignments Basic Sys tern C...

Page 331: ...sy Override Tone Option Basic System Station Class of Service Basic System Fixed Call Forward Voice Calls Only Basic System 36 37 37 38 39 40 40 41 4i 1 41 2 41 3 41 4 42 O 42 l 8 42 i System NT Button Lock Password Changing Station Assignment Basic System CO and Tie Line Ring Transfer Camp on Recall Time Basic System Park Recall Timing Basic System Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type B...

Page 332: ...Being with or Digits Toll Restriction Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Area Codes Assigned by Class Toll Restriction Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Office Codes Assigned by Class for Local Calls Toll Restriction 46 10 m80 Toll Restriction Class Parameters Toll Restriction 46 l 1 81 Toll Restriction Class Parameters Toll Restriction 46 21 31 Toll Restriction Classes 2 w 8 41 51 Toll Restriction 61 ...

Page 333: ...and Call Waiting Tone Attendant Console Attendant Console Answer Button Priority Assignments Attendant Console Attendant Console Overflow Destination Assignments Attendant Console 59 60 l 60 2 7 60 8 69 70 71 o 71 1 3 71 4 71 5 71 73 72 74 76 1 76 2 77 1 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes Attendant Console SMDR Data Output Options Basic System SMDR Output Account Code Digit Length Call Forwar...

Page 334: ...onic and Digital Telephone Ringing Tones CO Line Calls Basic Sys tern Ground Loop Start CO Line to Directory Number Button LED Flash Assignments Basic System Ground Loop Start CO Line Station Auto Attendant Attendant Console and Distributed Hunt Group Ringing Assignments Basic System Initializing Program 00 99 Basic System 91 l 91 2 91 9 92 93 97 Automatic PCB Recognition Port Renumber Basic Syste...

Page 335: ...NIS Non DNIS Assignments 20 39 Computer Interface Unit and Data Interface Unit Configuration RPCI DI for ANI DNIS Caller ID 1 Flexible Button Assignments for Unanswered Caller ID and or ANI Stored Number Auto Dial 51 Station Memory Allocation to Store Called ID and or ANI Numbers on Abandoned Unanswered Calls 52 Called ID and or ANI Line Circuit Abandoned Call Number Store Station Owner Assignment...

Page 336: ...lass of Service for Camp on BOV Tone to Std Telephone Handset Caller ID 03 Code 81 Flexible PCB Cabinet and Slot Assignments for 8 CKT Caller ID 1o 3 System Assignments Caller ID AN1 Numbers are sent out SMDI Port 20 Computer Interface Unit and Data Interface Unit Configuration RPCI Di for Caller ID 39 Flexible Button Assignments for Unanswered Caller ID and or ANI Stored Number Auto Dial 50 Calle...

Page 337: ...Ns PhDNs 09 Built in Auto Attendant Prompt Station Assignments for Distributed Hunt DNs PhDNs or ACD Group Number 33 Phantom Directory Number PhDN Owner Telephone Assignment 39 71 73 79 81 84 87 PDN SDN and PhDN Button Assignments PDN and PhDN Ringing Assignments Door Phone to DN Flashing Assignments Ground Loop Start CO Line to DN Button LED Flash Assignments Distributed Hunt Group Not operationa...

Page 338: ...Assignments for Night Transfer Lock Tenant 1 w 4 Used to lock system ringing mode DAY DAY2 NIGHT 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes for Night Transfer Lock Tenant 1 u 4 Used to lock system ringing mode DAY DAY2 NIGHT OCA 74 31 System NT Button Lock Password Station Class of Service for Handset OCA Handset OCA Warning Tone 35 Station Class of Service for No CF NA Handsfree or OCA Open Archi...

Page 339: ...SMDI SMDR Toll Restriction 76 l 76 2 1o 3 60 l 35 45 1 45 2 RSIWRSIWRMDS Port Assignments System Assignments Caller ID AN1 Numbers are sent out the SMDI Port SMDR Data Output Options Station Class of Service for Toll Restriction After Answer Restrict Office Codes in Local and All Other Area Codes Allow Special Numbers that do not begin with or Digits 45 3 46 2 4 46 6 8 Allow Special Numbers that b...

Page 340: ......

Page 341: ...d sheet for every program 00 w 99 including Toll Restriction and Least Cost Routing The system programmer programs the system from the data on the record sheets Star programs which are new programs and program enhancements introduced with the Strata DK280 are listed near the front of Chapter 10 The programs are located behind the program of the same name e g Program 09 follows Program 09 An Accoun...

Page 342: ...ram number 8 3 1 Programming Data Entry Overview Keystrokes for entering data from System Record Sheets follow a pattern consisting of a five step process described below and illustrated in Figure 8 l _ Detailed data entry instructions are on the top of each System Record Sheet Button key sequences that stay the same for every program are shaded on each record sheet Button sequences that are uniqu...

Page 343: ... When programming a range of station ports the station s programming LEDs indicate whether the data programmed matches for all items in the range LED On Indicates that all ports in the range are programmed with the data choice that lights the particular LED LED Off Indicates that all ports in the range are programmed with the data choice that does not light the particular LED LED Flashing Indicate...

Page 344: ...om Toshiba this pattern is provided to show programming button LED assignment locations only General Note l Electronic 6000 6500 series telephones follow the same programming keystrip pattern as 2000 series Digital Telephones Figure 8 2 Programming Keystrips 8 3 3 Preparing the System for Programming This section explains how to prepare a system for programming including minimum hardware requireme...

Page 345: ...system hardware configuration 8 4 1 After Initialization Immediately after initializing the system with Program 91 9 and 91 1 1 Run Programs 03 and 19 1 to inform the software of the system option hardware configuration see Table 8 7 and the Program 19 record sheet 2 Run Program 00 to assign remote maintenance security codes see Table 8 8 With Strata DK280 Release 3 and above anytime after initial...

Page 346: ...nce with the handset on the hook Primary DN or Intercom IC7 T I Uclnclcln IRedialJ INT on some telephones Time in hours minutes seconds format HHMMSS from 000000 to 235959 If any of these values is a single digit precede with a zero RDL on some telephones Electronic telephones without the RDL button can press instead Figure 8 4 Setting System Time HOW TO SET THE DAY The day must be set from the el...

Page 347: ... of the Hunt From station A 33 SELECT 000 239 range of ports can be entered as specified in on the RUNT TO record sheet After the Hunt From port is entered press the button Do not press when entering a range 6 000 239 Enter the port number of the Hunt To point as recorded 33 SELECT 000 239 on the system record sheet Press LED button 01 to HUNT TO 000 239 delete a digit from Hunt To point ports 7 8...

Page 348: ...selection 5 OOO 239 30 SELECT 000 239 Enter the port number where the station being defined is connected Use three digits followed by a button A range of ports may be entered at once by using the button See Note on system record sheet 6 LED buttons 01 w 20 LED buttons 01 20 activate features for each station port or port range Make the following selections by turn ing the appropriate button LED ON...

Page 349: ...lows l LED ON all ports in range are enabled for that item l LED OFF all ports in range are disabled for that item l LED FLASHING some ports in range are enabled and some ports are disabled 7 Hold 30 SELECT 000 239 Secure data in system programming DATA PROGRAMMED 8 Spkr Speaker 30 SELECT Prepare system for another selection go back to step 5 or exit Program 30 continue with Step 9 9 Hold 30 SELEC...

Page 350: ... 3 Spkr Speaker 9 1 Hold PROGRAM 91 Access Program 91 System beeps after Spkr Speaker DATA STORE is pressed indicating the program number can be entered 4 Spkr Speaker Prepare system for the programs to be initialized 5 Press 9 91 SELECT SYSTEM INITIALIZATION 6 Press LED buttons 01 03 05 07 and 09 LEDs turn ON 7 Press Hold The telephone will exit the programming mode and button LEDs 01 03 05 07 an...

Page 351: ... programming mode Do not press Intercom or DN button 3 Spkr Speaker 9 1 Hold PROGRAM 91 Access Program 91 System beeps after Spkr Speaker is DATA STORE pressed to indicate the program number can be entered 4 Spkr Speaker Prepare system for the programs to be initialized 91 SELECT I 5 Press 6 Press LED buttons 01 02 LEDs turn ON 7 Hold The telephone will exit the programming mode and button LEDs 01...

Page 352: ...ram number and the high program number with an asterisk Note 0 0 9 9 will initialize all Programs 00 99 Star I Program memory follows Program 97 6 Hold 90 SELECT 00 99 Secure data in system programming LEDs 01 and 02 flash DATA PROGRAMMED 7 Spkr Speaker 90 SELECT Prepare system for another selection go back to step 5 or exit Program 90 continue with step 8 8 Hold Secure Program 90 data in system m...

Page 353: ...Memory station and system and user name display or 4 LED buttons 02 04 Clears timed reminders or 5 LED buttons 01 05 Presets the Ring Speaker Mute Ring and Intercom Tone BGM volume levels of all digital telephones to approximately midrange or 9 LED buttons 03 04 Clears Call Forward and Message Waiting R3 Memory except Fixed Call Forward Memory Hold Secure data in system programming Repeat steps 4 ...

Page 354: ...S DTMF receivers 11 03 SELECT 11 Initialized data assigns slot 11 to be a non optioned CARD 62 SLOT NUMBER PDKU without DSS console or OCA 12 66 03 SELECT 12 66 Initialized data assigns slots 12 66 to be empty CARD 00 LOT NUMBER 6 00 9s 03 SELECT 00 66 Dial the PCB code recorded on the record sheet CARD 00 97 Refer to the PCB code reference table on Program 03 System Record Sheet for a definition ...

Page 355: ...remote maintenance security code from the System Record Sheet four digit max Level 1 allows remote access to all programs and data Default Level 1 security code is 0000 or 00 SELECT 1 PASSWORD 0000 2 onno Define the Level 2 remote maintenance security 00 SELECT 2 code from the System Record Sheet PASSWORD 0000 four digit max Level 2 allows remote entry to v Programs 30 39 and 77 89 only Default Le...

Page 356: ...tion LCD RESPONSE 1 8 HOLD 00 SELECT I Secure Program 00 data in system memory DATA PROGRAMMED 9 Spkr Speaker PROGRAM Exit Program 00 Enter another program number see Table 8 4 or exit programming mode go to Step 10 System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 00 10 Hold NO 205 Exit programming mode JAN 20 SUN 06 58 DK0055 8 16 January 1996 ...

Page 357: ...ree digits plus Initialized data assigns station numbers 200 439 6 000 1 Enter the port s station number from the record sheet four digits max Note 04 SELECT 04 SELECT 000 INT 200 04 SELECT 000 239 INT XXXX Station numbers must not exceed four digits or conflict with feature access codes listed in Program 05 System Record Sheet 7 Hold Secure data in system programming 8 Spkr Speaker Prepare system...

Page 358: ... 8 l 8 January 1996 ...

Page 359: ...s except when installing RDTU PCBs when required per Tables I 9 and I IO of Chapter I Configuration 5 After all station attendant console and ground loop start line and RCIWRCIS PCBs are installed install all DID and tie line PCBs starting from the first numbered empty slot to the highest needed in left to right order Do not leave empty slots except when installing RDTU PCBs per Tables II I 11 2 a...

Page 360: ......

Page 361: ...rogram 91 9 also automatically runs all other initialization programs 91 1 90 00 99 92 1 9 CAUTION Program 91 9 will erase all program data and it will drop all calls if it is run while the system is in service If only minor programming changes are being added to a system in which the programming is basically correct skip this section To run Program 91 9 1 Ensure that the system meets minimum hard...

Page 362: ...rn the DK280 power off for 5 sec and then back on The Programs that require this data memory transfer process are listed on the Program 91 2 record sheet CAUTION Running Program 91 2 will drop all calls and interrupt telephone service for about 10 seconds Note Running Program 9 l 2 will not change or erase any customer data Program 924nitializing Speed Dial Numbers VM ID Codes Character Message Me...

Page 363: ...Sheet provides space to record station ports assigned to the station tie and DID line PCBs and line numbers assigned to the ground loop start CO tie and DID line PCBs When installing RCIU RCIS enter the Caller ID circuit numbers starting with 1 8 in place of the CO line number Each RCIUIRCIS slot uses eight Caller ID circuits Program 03 should be run for the slot of each new PCB when installing a ...

Page 364: ...ssigned and a new system numbering plan will have to be implemented Pay particular attention to the internal modem station number 19 and door phones 151 159 161 163 Station number assignments may have to be changed using Program 04 Program 05 Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing Two Call Park Pickup abbreviated dialing codes can be assigned to pick up parked calls These codes will replace the leng...

Page 365: ...pter 5 Section 5 7 2 for information on Attendant Console Load Share Programming see the DK280 ACD I M manual for ACD DID extension assignments Program 1O 1 System Assignments 1 The following options are available on a System wide basis LEDs 07 08 09 18 19 and 20 are initialized as ON n n n n n n n H Two CO Line Conference LED PO Two lines can be conferenced with one or two telephones digital elec...

Page 366: ...th DTMF to RSTU RSTU2 RDSU RSTS PSTU PESU ports including voice mail ports are not affected by this assignment See Program 10 2 for standard telephone port DTMF timing This program pertains to manual dialing or speed dialing from all Toshiba telephones except when manually dialing from 2000 series digital telephones When manually dialing from 2000 series telephones the signals last as long as the ...

Page 367: ...l Call voice page access code 39 is dialed or if the paging number is dialed on incoming tie DID or DNIS lines external page all n n n n n n zones may be included with All Call telephone speaker paging This option does not affect the All Call Page button function which activates electronic and digital telephone speakers only never external page See Program 17 LED 01 and Program 71 Privacy Override...

Page 368: ...ation and the DAY DAY2 and NIGHT modes are available with the three mode n operation Each ringing mode has distinct CO line ring assignments Programs 71 1 w 3 78 81 89 and 81 84 87 The three mode selection is useful for alternate answering positions Station users can change modes with the Night Transfer button on either a DSS console Program 29 a telephone Program 39 and or Attendant Consoles Prog...

Page 369: ...2 Toshiba VP products require the SW X0042 feature package C 0 Centrex for SMDI but not for Toshiba Proprietary RS 232 Interface 3 Toshiba Stratagy products support SMDI only in the standard configuration not Toshiba proprietary RS 232 interface q SMDI Station Number Digit Length LED 13 lo This refers to the station digit length that the SMDI voice mail system design requires This parameter is set...

Page 370: ...or either 1 5 or 3 seconds with this program The long pause is always 10 seconds Note This program applies to Speed Dial numbers used for both voice and data calls Data call pause length is determined by the program n Flash Timing Code 4 When on a CO line a station user can press the Flash button and the line will open flash for a period of either 2 seconds 0 2 seconds or 0 5 seconds depending on ...

Page 371: ...itialized as OFF n Automatic Release AR on Voice Mail or Voice Calls Code O On loop start CO lines some COs send the AR signal a 95 or 450 millisecond open of the CO line loop after an external party hangs up typically 1 15 seconds to disconnect a loop start line If the CO sends this signal after an external party hangs up and before the VM auto attendant transfers a call D tone will be sent to th...

Page 372: ...ignaling or no AR signaling for loop start lines AR signaling is sometimes referred to as Calling Party Control or Loop Supervision Program 15 CO line Tenant Assignments A system can be shared by more than one tenant business This program assigns lines to the tenants The RCTUC common control unit can support up to four tenants RCTUA RCTUB and RCTUBAIRCTUBB units can support two Initialized data as...

Page 373: ... ON for all DID lines To provide Camp on busy over RDTU tie line calls configure tie lines as DID lines in Program 41 2 LED 03 must be on for the January 1996 9 l 3 lines in Program 17 This is allowed because tie and DID signalling is the same for tie and DID l 1 lines Also both tie and DID lines that route per Program 71 DNIS assignments will camp on busy if LED 03 is turned on Tie lines that rou...

Page 374: ...program to designate that slot If the source will be connected to a PEKU or PESU turn LED 9 or LED 10 on in Program 10 2 to tell the system whether the PEKU or PESU will support the source LEDs 09 and IO in Program 10 2 should be OFF if the source will be connected to a PSTU RSTU RSTU2 or RDSU Only Circuit 2 of these PCBs can support the BGM source The alternate BGM source sends BGM to the externa...

Page 375: ...05 If the system CO lines are connected to a PBX Centrex or a Central Office that is slow to return dial tone after seizure light this LED to insert a pause before and after the PBX or Centrex access code is dialed by January 1996 9 l 5 w w w H w the DIU or RPCI Also light LED 05 to automatically insert a pause before network telephone numbers are autodialed by DlUs or RPCls Note The pause length ...

Page 376: ...ll ring the next hunt to station and so on If all RPCVPDIU stations in the hunt to sequence are busy then the data caller will receive a busy tone It is recommended that all PDIU DS station ports grouped in a modem pooling or printer pooling server configuration be placed into a hunt sequence arrangement with Program 22 Program 22 applies to PDIU DS and RPCI DI PDIU DI data calls not telephone sta...

Page 377: ... common control unit The RCTUA can support three DSS Consoles and the RCTUB RCTUBA BB can support four A DDSS console can only be connected to Circuit 8 of a PDKU and an HDSS console can only be connected to circuits 7 and 8 of a FEKU The telephone connected to circuit 1 of the PCB supporting a console is designated as an Attendant telephone Consoles and telephones are numbered 1 8 as they are ins...

Page 378: ... 10 2 The LED 18 option is for which calling station can use Executive Override n n n Note Executive Override can be blocked by stations that have Executive Privacy Override bldcking enabled in Program 37 LED 78 the Privacy on Line PRIVACY button does not block Executive Override See Table IO X Record Sheets DND Override LED 17 An electronic or digital telephone can have a button programmed for Do...

Page 379: ...1 or by pressing Intercom or PDN 6 5 5 for Code 2 press Redial to store n n n n a Forced Account Code LED 08 If this feature is selected a station or Direct Inward System Access DISA CO line user using a line with a Forced Account requirement Program 15 7 must enter an Account Code before the outgoing CO tie DID line call can be completed If Forced Account Codes should be verified turn on LED 14 i...

Page 380: ...D 20 is lit LEDs 17 and 19 must be lit IMPORTANT Do not assign Program 31 VM AA options to built in Auto Attendant digital announcer ports n q n Toshiba VP or Stratagy B Station Number LED 20 This feature is designed for Toshiba VP or Stratagy systems connected to a standard telephone port PSTU RSTU RSTU2 PESU RDSU DTMF B tone followed by the station number is sent to Toshiba VP or Stratagy in sit...

Page 381: ...hat receive Headset OCA does not apply to speaker OCA n n OCA Handset or Speaker LED 14 If a station is enabled to receive OCA Program 31 LED 03 ON LED 14 defines which typ e of OCA Headset Handset or Speaker the telephone should receive Note Speaker OCA requires a DVSU DKT or HVSU EKT installed in the telephone that should receive OCA and a special Program 03 code DKT or three pair wiring EKT Hea...

Page 382: ...oice Mail VM No Conference LED 09 If activated a station is prohibited from having any Conference calls It should be used for VM RSTU RSTU2 PSTU PESU RDSUIRSTS ports to prevent undesirable Conference calls between two voice mail Auto Attendant ports Voice Mail VM Groups 1 4 LED 05 w 08 The system allows up to four VM station port groups to be configured for support of up to four VM auto attendant ...

Page 383: ...tion The voice mail port assigned will be called when the station user presses the telephone MSG button after the MSG LED has been set flashing by the voice mail machine The Message Center port is normally the first voice mail standard telephone port in the Program 31 Voice Mail Group and the Program 40 Voice Mail Distributed Hunt Group It is normally the same port for all stations Program 33 Stat...

Page 384: ...to the busy station The busy station will be alerted of the camp on by a camp on tone see Program 31 LED 11 the CO line LED will flash at the exclusive hold rate and a message CAMP ON X X the line number will appear on the LCD if equipped Among other applications a VM auto attendant device that transfers calls to a typically busy answering position station will benefit from this feature Some auto ...

Page 385: ... have this option for systems operating with the RCTUC D common control unit 32 with the RCTUB RCTUBA BB and 16 with the RCTUA This program defines which ports can have this feature Initialized data assigns the lowest ports to have this ability A low port must be disabled before adding a port above the initialized ports n Message Waiting RCV LED 04 If the message waiting indication is not desired ...

Page 386: ...D 07 ON Program 37 Park Recall Timing Each station can have a different duration from 011 to 9990 seconds from the time of parking a call to the time the parked party recalls the station Initialized data assigns a park recall time of 032 seconds to all ports Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type Four telephone button arrangements are provided see the Program 38 System Record Sh...

Page 387: ...e set for one of several PAD settings n Enter 1 for 6 decibel dB padding n Enter 2 for 3 dB n Enter 3 for 0 dB n Enter 4 for 3 dB 6 Enter 5 for 6 dB initialized setting q Enter 6 for 9 dB q Enter 7 for 12 dB n Enter 8 for 15 dB Program 41 4 Tl Span Receive Level Pad Assignments The receive level of each RDTU can be set for one of several PAD settings n Enter 1 for 6 decibel dB padding I n Enter 2 ...

Page 388: ...one that must store abandon call information for Caller ID Ground Loop start lines and or ANI DID tie lines must be allocated Abandon Call Memory using this Program 1 2 3 4 IMPORTANT On direct incoming calls that ring on more than one telephone the Caller ID Ground Loop start line must also be assigned to the designated abandon call storage LCD telephone in Program 62 If a CO line only direct ring...

Page 389: ...low call will ring on either the In Trans button assigned in Program 59 of the console that receives the overflow call or the Intercom DN or CO line button of a station Program 58 2 LED 01 Attendant Console Display Type Base units can connect to an Electroluminescent EL or Extended Graphics Adapter EGA Display This program identifies in software the type of display connected to each console Progra...

Page 390: ...ly for outgoing calls Local and long distance call data will be sent out Forced Voluntary Account Code Digit Length item 4 The Account Code entered at a station can vary in length from 4 15 digits For Forced Account Code use a call will not be completed unless the specified number of digits is entered by a station user In the case of Voluntary Account Codes the Account Code will not be sent to the...

Page 391: ...al Requirement Assigned on a station by station basis in Program 30 LED 14 ON All Account Codes dialed Forced or Voluntary from stations assigned in this program will be verified n Code Change Stations selected in Program 30 LED 15 ON can change Verified Account Codes VAC by dialing the following Intercom or PDN 6 5 9 0 0 0 s 2 9 9 VAC Redial n Verified Account Codes Forced Voluntary Program Optio...

Page 392: ...s PDNs SDNs PhDNs using program 71 1 Program 71 72 and 73 must also be used to assign the telephones on which the DNs appear to ring When assigning DNIS numbers to route to ACD and DH groups using Program 71 the telephones and appropriate PDN SDN or PhDN in these groups must also be assigned to ring in Program 71 72 and 73 This program can also be used with non DNIS or non ANI tie and or DID lines...

Page 393: ...idual telephone user can disable enable the DNIS name display by using the Mode 60 61 function on his her LCD telephone 2 The DNIS extension name can be assigned or not assigned to display as a priority over the ANI display in Program 17 LEDOG when both ANI and DNIS digits are received on the same call 3 If a name is not assigned to a DNIS number DN XXXX will display on telephone LCDs when the DNI...

Page 394: ...phone or attendant console flexible button Program 39 Each ringing mode allows incoming calls to be routed to different destinations An NT Lock button can be assigned Program 39 to lock the system into a ringing mode To lock the system ringing mode requires a password The password for each NT I 4 button is assigned in this program Attendant consoles and stations assigned in Program 36 can also cha...

Page 395: ...support DDCBs but not HDCBs PEKUs and PESUs can support HDCBs but not DDCBs After assignment of a DDCB or HDCB door phone numbers 151 159 161 163 will effectively replace the station number assignment in Program 04 The door lock option is set via Program 77 2 n RMDS or IMDU Modem LED 14 This program enables the DK280 built in maintenance modem function RMDS or IMDU If the RMDS or IMDU remote modem...

Page 396: ...Night Transfer application see NT Relay LED 06 or Music on Hold MOH If used for MOH the relay will activate when any 9 36 January 1996 trunk or station is placed on hold The intended application is to control a tape player which can be used as a Music on Hold source Program 77 2 Door Phone Busy Signal and Door Lock Assignments Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF q Door Phone Ring Count LED 20 The ...

Page 397: ...nes to be used with the Direct Inward System Access DISA features These lines may be set for DISA operation during the different system modes of DAY DAY2 and NIGHT A line will switch to normal ringing after ten seconds if the outside caller does not use the DISA feature Normal function of these lines occurs for outgoing calls Note An optional security code for DISA outgoing lines calls is availabl...

Page 398: ...nd 87 data should be blank for CO lines that ring VM ports q Built in Auto Attendant AA Delay Answer Ringing Option can be programmed to answer incoming calls on a delayed ringing basis in either the Day Day2 or Night mode For example to have a line answered by the AA on a Delay1 or Delay2 basis during the Day mode first assign the line for the AA feature in Program 78 61 To have the line answered...

Page 399: ...ovides the programmer with an overview of the Toll Restriction feature and step by January 1996 9 39 step instructions to fill in the Toll Restriction System Record Sheets 9 3 1 Toll Restriction Methods Toll Restriction screens and selectively restricts outgoing calls using three different methods Each type of restriction can be programmed for individual stations Toll Restriction can also be enabl...

Page 400: ...verride toll restrictions defined at the station Program 44 l 8 or 45 8 9 Codes may be changed by stations chosen in programming see Basic System Features Program 30 S pecial Common Carrier Authorization Toll Restriction can be programmed to recognize Other Common Carrier OCC telephone numbers directory numbers authorization codes and Centrex PBX access codes The system starts inspecting numbers f...

Page 401: ... these special numbers can be programmed When dialed these numbers will be sent out immediately bypassing any Verified Account Code dialing restrictions set in Programs 69 and 30 button LEDs 8 and 14 respectively If lines are behind Centrex or PBX program the appropriate one or two digit Centrex PBX line access code in front of the emergency number Example If the PBX line access code is 9 then pro...

Page 402: ... three digits of a ten digit number is an area code if the middle digit is 0 or 1 Pressing the first three digits immediately after a 1 in an eight digit string is an office code A seven digit string starting with an office code is a local call Plan 2 for dialing plan i AC NXX l tNNX should be selected if the installation is in a location where a user places a long distance call to a destination o...

Page 403: ...t Routing purposes Only area codes of the form N O l X are valid on call processing for the old dial plans I 2 3 New area codes NXX are valid only in new NANP dialing plans 7 8 9 Office codes of the form NNX and NXX are valid on call processing for the old dialing plans I 2 3 and new dialing plans 7 8 9 respectively For international calls area code 07 1 and office codes XXX as country codes are v...

Page 404: ...Codes R3 Program 45 Dial Plan 7 8 or 9 only n Up to four office codes can be assigned to be restricted for all area codes Initialized data assigns the office code 976 Dial Up Services to be restricted E This program only applies to telephone users which belong to toll restriction classes assigned via Program 48 If a telephone user does not belong to any class he she is not subject to any of the re...

Page 405: ...a table displays with 8 then it is allowed Anything not displaying is not allowed Initialized data allows all office codes in the home area code for each class For each class choose whether the record table is used to record allowed office codes in memory allowed or denied office codes not in memory denied Enter the office codes that define the set Programs 46 10 80 46 11 81 Toll Restriction Class...

Page 406: ...triction for the station This is used to prevent a user from dialing a second call when dial tone is returned from a CO after the outside party disconnects n 2 Disable Digit Restriction Enter 0 in the Digit Restrict Code column next to the port number to disable digit restriction for the station This allows toll restricted users to dial any number of digits e g to an external voice mail device com...

Page 407: ...column in the space provided for the port number if the selected station will be assigned to the Class 7 level of restriction Class 7 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46 and exception office code tables in 46 70 4 10 Class 8 Toll Restriction Enter 10 in the Station Restrict Code column in the space provided for the port number if the selected station will be assigned to the...

Page 408: ...s or other special services can be specified as call routes LCR Modified Digit Assignments Carrier codes can be programmed to dial automatically when a call is placed over the appropriate route Digits can be added to the front or back of special common carrier codes or other access numbers to make placing calls an invisible process for the user Digits may also be deleted from the front of the dial...

Page 409: ...g LCR All stations that must use LCR to make outgoing calls must NOT be restricted in this program These restrictions do apply to LCR 4 Refer to Basic System Record Program 41 to restrict stations from accessing outgoing lines except through LCR All stations that must use LCR for outgoing calls must be restricted from line access in this program 9 5 2 Program 50 Series LCR Definitions Program 50 I...

Page 410: ...stance information calls will be routed Typically long distance information calls are routed over the local call route defined in Program 50 5 The RCTUC D common control unit can support up to 16 plans and the RCTUA RCTUBAIBB and the RCTUB units can support up to eight n If the long distance information plan is chosen in Program 50 1 the call is routed as defined by this table n Initialized data a...

Page 411: ...am 50 5 This usually is programmed by the installer to be Route Plan Number 1 rather than the default Plan 16 Program 52 LCR Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code The purpose of the Office Code Exception Table is to enable the customer the flexibility of routing specific office codes through a different call plan than other office codes used with that area code q n n Sixteen LCR office co...

Page 412: ...oute should be entered in the left most position and the least desirable route in the right most position If 1 is assigned to Station Group 1 and 1 for route definition only then those assigned will only be able to use Route Definition 4 thereby restricting them during times that route definition 1 is not allowed Keep in mind that the route definition number is being entered not the CO line group ...

Page 413: ... specified in the Pause Entry Reference Table Each pause takes two digits of memory space n Try to allow for the longest wait e g make the pause longer rather than shorter to accommodate the length of time a carrier may need to access the service tones etc Program 55 2 LCR Modified Digits Add to End of Dialed Number Enter the digits that must be added to the end of the number dialed in the Add Dig...

Page 414: ... 9 54 January 1996 ...

Page 415: ...except when installing RDTU PCBs when required per Tables 1 9 and 1 l 0 of Chapter 1 Configuration 5 After all station attendant console and ground loop start line and RCIWRCIS PCBs are j installed install all DID and tie line PCBs starting from the first numbered empty slot to the highest needed in left to right order Do not leave empty slots except when installing RDTU PCBs per Tables 11 1 11 2 ...

Page 416: ......

Page 417: ...n after Program 91 9 is run for PCBs which have options such as Dual tone Multi frequency Receivers RRCS DSS consoles etc l Program 9 l 9 will also bring back logical and physical ports to their initialized settings l If entering a customer database into RCTU memory before other system PCBs stations lines options are installed it will be necessary to run Program 03 after Program 97 9 to identify w...

Page 418: ...lways complete Program 90 at new system installs before programming anything else Skipping this step may cause erratic system behavior If Program 91 9 is completed it is not necessary to run Program 90 after running Program 9 l 9 l Follow instructions in Table 8 5 in Chapter 8 Programming Introduction to c ear this data l To initialize all programs a must be entered between 00 and 99 l Each progra...

Page 419: ...ram 03 must still be run to identify PCB options such as RRCS codes 92 93 and 94 and PDKU codes 62 and 64 etc Program 91 l does NOT erase Program 03 option codes previously assigned with Program 03 l Run Program 9l 1 to bring back logical and physical ports to their Programs 01 and 02 initialized settings This program does not change numbers set in Program 04 M4 05 05 9 or 71 and does not erase da...

Page 420: ...ce is required on a few programs which are listed below l When programming with a telephone connected to Port 005 Program 03 Ml 2 60 and 76 data must be transferred from temporary to working memory When programming with 28OBackup and or 280Admin Program 03 x4 l 2 tits0 and 76 1 data must be transferred from temporary to working memory l This program does not change or erase any programmed data inc...

Page 421: ...e Waiting R3 Memory all stations Notes 1 Program 92 5 does not affect digital telephone handset receiver volume levels Use Program 27 to set off hook handset receiver volume levels for digital telephones 2 Program 92 9 does not affect Call Forward External or Fixed Call Forward settings IMPORTANT It is mandatory to complete all parts of Program 92 at every new system install If Program 92 is not c...

Page 422: ...KEYl AA Indicates built in Auto Attendant software KEY2 ACD indicates Automatic Call Distribution software and AA KEY3 ACD MIS Indicates Automatic Call Distribution Management L Information System Software plus AA and ACD KEY4 Open Architecture OA interface and AA plus AA ACD and ACD MIS7 2 Initialized passwords are 0000 3 The LCD responds as follows when a selection is made 0 Version 1 Password 2...

Page 423: ... X NG Y NG x 00000 x ooooo3 RCTU RAM test is provided by DK280 Release 3 RCTUs and above only Run each RCTU RAM test when first installing an RCTU PCB after running initialization Program 91 9 RCTU RAM test can also be performed any time maintenance or trouble shooting is required on an installed system that contains a custom database programmed on the RCTU The RCTU database programming is not aff...

Page 424: ... for Program 0 1 and 02 is logical port number physical port number Program 90 9 1 1 or 9 l 9 will initialize Program 0 1 and 02 RCTU Station Ports for DK280 Release 1 2 and 3 are RCTUA 000 031 RCTUB RCTUBA BB 000 079 and RCTUC D 000 239 The system allows only like ports to be reassigned see below Allo wed l Digital to Digital Ports PDKU PDKU RDSU Potts l Electronic to Electronic Ports PEKU PEKU P...

Page 425: ... PCBTYPE IOPTIONS I I I I I I I l l ICO TIE DID LINE NUMBERS I I I I I I EXPANSION CLhBINET CABINET 3 SLOTNUMBER S31 S32 S33 S34 S36 S36 S373 1S383 PCBCODE I PCBTYPE OPTIONS I STATION TIE DID PORTNUMBERS I TMIEE DLINE I I I I I I WI See notes following Program 03 record sheets PCB 1 CODE 1 PORTS TYPE 1 PEKU EOCU 22 8 STATIONS PEKU w DSS 23 8 STATIONS PEKU 24 8 STATIONS DSS EOCU PESU 257 6 STATIONS...

Page 426: ...otes following Program 03 record sheets or Run Program 91 2 R3 REFERENCE TABLE I PCB 1 CODE 1 PORTS TYPE RCOU RGLU PCOU 117 4GRNO LOOPLlNES RCOU FiCOS 177 8LOOPCOLlNES RDDU5 167 4 DID LINES PEMU REMU5 137 4TIE LINES PEKU 217 BSTATIONS PEKU EOCU 22 ESTATIONS PEKUw DSS 23 aSTATIONS PEKU 24 aSTATiONS DSSEOCU PESU 257 6STATlONS PESU OCA 26 6STAT10NS RDSU RSTS2 277 aSTATIONS ROSU RSTS2 28 8STATlDNS OCA...

Page 427: ...slots 547 S48 S57 558 567 and S68 they are for future use 7 Program 91 1 and 91 9 will automatically assign PCB codes marked by footnote 9 if the appropriate Host PCB is installed when Program 91 1 or 91 9 is run Programs 9 l 1 or 91 9 do not assign option codes Program 03 must be run to assign codes for all options except RCOS codes not marked with 9 Program 91 9 will erase option codes assigned ...

Page 428: ...ber Cabinet and Slot Number CABINET SLOT CABINET SLOT CABINET SLOT CABINET SLOT CABINET SLOT 1 RCTUA provides Station Ports 000 031 Ports 032 039 are reserved for special functions with RCJUA 2 RCTLJB and RCTUBA BB provide Stafion Ports 000 079 Ports 080 089 are reserved for special functions with RCTUB and RCTtJBA BB 3 RCTUC D provides Station Ports 000 239 Ports 240 249 are reserved for special ...

Page 429: ... JlilJ J JSpkrl SELECT Logical Port Number INT intercom or Primary Directory Number 1 4 digits or Key 014 Station Intercom or Primary Logical Directory Numbers Port Initialized 040 240 041 241 042 242 043 243 044 244 045 245 046 246 047 247 048 248 049 249 050 250 051 1 251 I 052 252 053 253 054 254 055 255 056 256 057 257 058 258 See notes on first page of Program 04 January 1996 10 13 ...

Page 430: ...Only continue ltm ls l sPkrlnr r nr r n Spkr iij F SELECT Logical Port Number 7 INT Intercom or Primary Directory Number 1 4 digits or Key 014 108 308 109 309 110 310 111 311 112 312 113 313 114 314 115 315 116 316 117 317 118 318 119 319 CABINET SLOT CABINET SLOT See notes on first page of Program 04 10 14 January 1996 ...

Page 431: ...T llsFiWFl lspkrlmRlWold ISpkrllnnn nnnniHola ISpkr I ISpkrJW F SELECT Logical Port Number T INT Intercom or Primary Directory Number 1 4 digits or Key 014 Station Intercom or Primary Logical Directory Numbers Port Initialized 120 320 121 321 122 322 123 323 124 324 125 i325j 126 1326 See notes on first page of Program 04 January 1996 10 15 ...

Page 432: ...cal Ports 160 199 RCTUC D Only continued SELECT Logical Port Number I INT Intercom or Primary Directory Number 1 4 dinik nr KPV ni4 182 183 184 185 186 187 CABINET 188 SLOT 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 CABINET 196 SLOT 197 198 I 199 See notes on first page of Program 04 DK0094 lo 16 January 1996 ...

Page 433: ...03 403 204 404 205 405 206 406 207 407 208 408 209 409 210 410 211 411 212 412 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 See notes Physical Ports v30 201 PhysicalRecord Cabinet and Modular Jack Location and Station Type Slot Number PW 203 CABINET 204 SLOT 205 206 207 208 2iij CABINET 212 SLOT 213 214 215 2161 T i219j CABINE 220 SLOT...

Page 434: ...Number Directory Number xxx YYYY 540 540 541 541 542 542 543 543 544 544 545 545 546 546 547 547 548 548 549 549 550 550 551 551 552 552 553 553 554 554 555 5551 556 i556j 557 557 558 558 559 559 560 560 561 561 562 562 563 563 564 564 I 565 i565j 566 566 567 567 568 568 569 569 570 570 571 571 572 5721 hitialized data Phantom Port Phantom Reference Number Directory Number xxx YYYY 580 580 581 581...

Page 435: ...e Phantom Directory Number I Enter the Phantom Directory Number YYYY that should be assigned to the selected Phantom Port Reference Number 1 to 4 digits lnifialized data lnitializeddafa lrectory Number Initialized data General Note l Initialized data Phantom Port Reference Number Phantom Directory Number January 1996 10 19 ...

Page 436: ...58 DHG 909 859 DHG 910 f860 DHG 911 861 DHG 912 862 DHG 913 863 i DHG 915 I lnifialized data Note 1 Available with DK280 Release 3 I or higher General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l When editing the data field use Button LED 0 1 to delete existing data l Initialized data are blank for all Distributed Hunt Numbers l See Program 09 or 71 for DID line ...

Page 437: ...Over External Speakers ON 491 Station Automatic Busy Redial Conf 44 200 only Automatic Busy Redial Cancel Int 44 BGM Over External Speakers OFF 49O Station Message Waiting Answer 408 from INT 200 only PDN or PhDN Cancel Message Waiting at Station 409 from INT Display PDN SDN or PhDN on LCD PDN or PhDN 407 Access Code Speed Dial Prefix 44 or 3 Emergency Call to Attendant Console 400 Start Trace 489...

Page 438: ...FF GQ Station No C D Voice Mail ID Code Set Call Fwd 656 System Speed Dial Set N A 60 99 RCTUA Voice Mail ID Code Set Ans MW 657 only LCD Message Set 68 LCD User Name 621 Set 620 Reset DKT Mute Ring Adjust 6101 TR dial plan Set 650 6267 7 8 g Change DKT Ring Level Adjust 6102 DISA Security Code Change 658 Port Swap Station Relocation OFF 6281 Verified Account Code Change 659 Station Relocation ON ...

Page 439: ...Notes For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets For dialing convenience the 1 or 2 digit abbreviation for Call Park Pickup replaces the Call Park access codes 33 1 and 332 To park calls Code 33 1 332 must still be used if the Program 39 Call Park buttons are not available on a telephone Changing the 33 1 332 codes only applies to Call Park Pickup Initialized DATA blank ...

Page 440: ... numbers A Enter Program 09 and then see SELECT on the LCD B Press the desired leading digit and then see AUTO ATT DIAL on the LCD C Press and then the Hold button The first digk will now be set and DATA PROGRAMED will again appear on the LCD D Press Spkr and press a second digit and then see AUTO ATT DIAL on the LCD E Enter the destination station Intercom or DN assigned to the two digit prompt a...

Page 441: ...ON NUMBER LOGICAL 1 4 DIGITS PORT INITIALIZED EEEl 099 100 101 102 103 104 304 105 3051 I 106 107 108 t 109 110 111 112 113 F 114 115 116 117 I 118 318 119 319 DK0102 Notes 1 To range program Enter port range X X X Y Y Y then set DIAL to the first extension number in the range and press Hold The extension numbers will automatically be numbered in successive order XXX low port YYY high port Do not ...

Page 442: ... DID EXTENSION STATION NUMBER LOGICAL 1 4 DIGITS PORT 1 INITIALIZED DID EXTENSION STATION NUMBER LOGICAL 1 4 DIGITS PORT INITIALIZED 154 354 355 356 357 358 359 I 188 1 388 I 390 I Mli I r JL 193 393 394 395 396 194 195 196 197 198 199 STATION LOGICAL PORT DID EXTENSION NUMBER 1 4 DIGITS INITIALIZED See notes on previous page I DK0103 1O 26 January 1996 ...

Page 443: ...tialized 1 To range program Enter pot t in the range and press Hold successive order XXX low F General Note l Press Button 01 to blank erase L 601 602 J c 603 564 604 565 605 566 606 I 606 vi7 607 I lfw7 608 608 609 609 570 610 610 571 611 611 572 612 612 573 613 613 574 614 614 F7E 615 615 616 _ 616 617 617 J V 618 i7cl 619 I Initialized Initialized L range XXX Y Y Y then sef DIAL fo the first ex...

Page 444: ... Reference 620 739 SELECT PhDN Ref Port Numbed I DIAL DID Extension Number 1 4 Digits DID EXTENSION t WI 1 bS 658 1 658 f 1 659 1 659 Initialized See notes on previous page 695 1 695 696 1 696 1 Initialized I Initialized 1O 28 January 1996 ...

Page 445: ... DHG 910 DHG 911 DHG 912 DHG 913 DHG 914 DHG 915 1 lnitiabed data is blank Note 1 Available with DK280 Release 3 1 or higher General Notes I l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l When editing the data field use Button LED 01 to delete existing data l Initialized data are blank for all Distributed Hunt Numbers l See Program 09 or 71 for DID line call routing to D...

Page 446: ...LED 06 for tones sent to Voice Mail ports 3 If Ring Transfer is allowed set Ring Transfer Recall time in Program 37 if ring transfer is not allowed LED 07 off the station will recall immediately if transfer is attempted 4 Standard ring pattern is 1 sec on 3 sec off 5 Two CO line Conference must be allowed for DISA CF EXT and DNIS external routing operation 6 CO line guard time is the time interval...

Page 447: ...6 2 Called party receives notification tone when calling party activates Auto Call Back 3 BGM connected to the PEKU or PEW will be sent to electronic and digital telephone speakers and external page optional To assign the BGM PCB slot number see Program 19 1 4 The ring pattern for standard telephone distinctive ring on incoming trunk calls is 0 2 sec on O 4 sec off 0 2 sec on 3 4 sec off intercom ...

Page 448: ... disconnect time period time out the call will disconnect This is to prevent loop start lines from being locked up when there is no CPC supervision from the central office after the outside caller hangs P 4 Set LED IO 13 ON so that their HEX values add up to the Voice Mail station digit length for SMDI VM interface Example For Vpf 00 or Stratagy SMDI interface set LEDs IO 11 and 12 on for 7 digits...

Page 449: ...E instead of SELECT CODE 2 The duration of time the RCOU RCOS or PCOlJ circuit opens Tip Ring when the Flash or MW FL button is pressed or hookflash code CnfiTrn CONFiTRANS 4 5 is dialed 3 This timing is not used in the United States 4 This timing applies to voice calls originated from telephones and data calls orginated by system Data Interface Units 5 DISA Call Forward External and or DNIS Telep...

Page 450: ... may receive and store up to 3 message waiting indications per PDN or PhDN owned by the telephone from any other electronic or digital telephone A fourth message waiting indication may be set by the Message Center electronic or digital telephone only l The Message Center is allowed to perform Message Waiting IIeven if disallowed on all other stations l Initialized data no port assigned l The messa...

Page 451: ... key to display and advance 3 The Automatic Release AR signal is called Calling Party Control CPC or Supervised Loop Control This signal consists of a momentary open of the loop start CO line provided by some Central Office CO the duration of the open depends on the CO If a CO line is programmed Programs 15 O and 15 3 to detect the AR signal the DK system will drop the line when the CO sends the s...

Page 452: ... 001 144 J CO Line Range nnnmnnn COLINE 1 TENANTGROUP General Note L TENANT Assign the CO line to a tenant 1 4 l Initialized all CO lines assigned to Tenant 7 ENANTGROUP I 096 097 098 099 i 100 CO LINE TENANTGROUP 1c2 3 4 101 102 103 _ DK0113 1O 36 January 1996 ...

Page 453: ...overed by this table Copy this page for more trunks Notes DK0114 1 To turn all CO LEDs on or off after the Line Group is entered press the VOW all LEDs on or VOW all LEDs off To check a particular CO line after the Line Group is entered press and enter the CO line number then use the button to display and advance 2 To advance the CO line range press the Scroll button beneath the LCD Press the Page...

Page 454: ...ase 3 LED 01 may be on to allow Page access on fie and DID lines programmed with DNIS assignments in Program 71 Code 039 For public telephone networks tie DID or DNIS lines must a ways be restricted LED 01 OFF from Page and Handsfree Answerback per FCC regulations N normal non AN and or DNIS tie DID lines should use Program 71 and 72 assignments instead of Program 04 tie and Program M9 DID assignm...

Page 455: ......

Page 456: ...t be wired to Circuit 2 An isolation transformer may be required if connecting the source to a RSTU RSTU2 RDSU or PSTU See Chapter 6 Peripheral Installation for isolation transformer installation instructions l LED 09 PEKU or LED 10 PESU in Program IO 2 must be ON to enable the BGM connection Program 10 2 LED 09 and 10 must be OFF when connecting BGM to RSTU RSTU2 RDSU or PSTU l BGM cannot be conn...

Page 457: ...f type DCE or DTI DKOl 1 Auto pause will be inserted after a Centrex or PBX access code is dialed by a D U or RPCI CO line must be assigned in Program 42 O and must have access code assigned in Program 42 1 8 Pause time is determined by Program 12 3 A pause will a so be inserted after the CO line access code is dialed by the D U in all cases if LED 05 is turned on 2 Only turn LED 04 on if a PDIU D...

Page 458: ...ment 3 U I Assignment 4 I 1 Assignment 5 I U Assignment 6 I U Assignment 7 I U Assignment 8 I U Assignment 9 U I Assignment 10 I II General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets 9 initialized data is blank l DlUs can be connected to any ports associated with PDKU circuits except for ports associated with Circuit 8 on a PDKUI All PDKU2 circuits can support DI...

Page 459: ... A range of ports may be assigned by pressing the following button sequence q 0cI 00 7 low port7 IHigh port 2 Press Button LED 01 to delete a digit from hunt to port General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initialized data does not assign hunt to ports to any port I l Program 22 applies to RCPI DI PDIU DI and PDIU DS data stations If programming a RC...

Page 460: ...IT 2 NO Pot t Enter the station logical port number to which the device will be assigned I Device I Pot l Number I I 4 I Program 25 1 Incoming Built in Auto Attendant Call Overflow Time SELECT 1 I l AAIT TIME Seconds Before Overflowing Enter the number of seconds 12 24 General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Overflow stations and delay ring operation...

Page 461: ...6 seconds to all ports l This timer sets the time that Auto Attendant calls to a busy station will camp on before routing back to a primary announcement or to the calling CO line s normal ring pattern See Program 10 3 LED 3 for routing option after Camp on Busy The time set in this program applies to the called station l This program only applies to Auto Attendant Built in calls it does not apply ...

Page 462: ...umber IT L VR Enter volume level 1 4 Lowest I Total DKT Volume Range VR Highest Volume 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Volume L Set VR 1 4 for initial off hook handset receiver volume level VR resets to programmed level 1 4 after each call on hook off hook General Notes l Initialized value is VR 2 l Each level is equivalent to a 2 dB change DKOI I ...

Page 463: ...nsoles and RCTUC D 8 DSS consoles Genera Notes DK012 8 l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Refer to Program 03 Flexible PCB Slot Assignments for the PCB slots of PEKUs and PDKUs configured to support consoles l The system automatically assigns the console supported by the PEKU or PDKU in the lowest number PCB slot to be Console number 1 See Note 2 above l The ...

Page 464: ...SS Line CO or SD buttons but they may not be Station Speed Dial 10 49 reassigned to other button locations _ System Speed Dial3 2 Initialized key assignments are shown following the Program 29 600 699 System Record Sheets 3 or 60 99 With DK280 release 1 2 and 3 RCTUA provides 40 system speed dial numbers 60 99 RCTUB RCTUBAIBB and RCTU C D CO Line Access 001 144 provides 700 system speed dial numbe...

Page 465: ...Program 29 Initialized DSS Console Button Assignments DK0126 January 1996 1 o 49 ...

Page 466: ...NE ACCESS 08 181 081 181 07 171 07 171 SYSTEMSPEED DIAL 061 051 041 03 141 04 141 131 031 131 STATIONSPEED DIAL i lilii _ A Initialized Data 021 Ol 121 02 1Zl ll 011 ll ADMl all RCTUPCBs Key01 2Ois OOO NOI9 ADM2 RCTU BAIBBand C D Key01 2Ois O20 IO39 ADM2 RCTUA Key01 12 is 020 031 Key13 2Ois OlO 017 Note 1 Primary Secondary Phantom directory numbers cannot be assigned to ADMs General Notes l For mo...

Page 467: ...04 03 02 _ 01 Notes 1 Initialized data reads LEDs 01 05 and 07 for all ports 2 A range of ports may be specified by entering nnlJ clcln Low 0 t t High port 3 To force a verified account code to be entered on two CO line DISA calls through the system turn LED 08 and 14 on for Port 039RCTLJA Port 089 RCTUB RCTUBA BB or 249 RCTU C D and Forced A C must be enabled for outgoing CO line in Program 15 7 ...

Page 468: ...6 PAGEGROUPE 05 PAGEGROUPD 04 PAGEGROUPC 03 PAGE GROUPB 02 PAGEGROUPA 01 Notes 1 Specify a range of ports by entering q nnlnno Low port7 High port General Notes l Initialized data reads all LEDs off l With DK280 Release 1 2 and 3 RCTUA RCTUB and RCTlJBAIBB can support four groups and RCTlJC RCTlJD can support eight groups l A maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to a particular page group l O...

Page 469: ...w should be lit Select Port Range Copy this page for more ports PORT b Feature LED f Toshiba VP or Strataov fB Station No 70 v J _ _ _ I Toshiba VP or Stratagy B No Station 1 19 I y I I I I I 1 Block FWPC Priv fhr 3 IIRI I I 8 I 1 1x1 I I I I I I I I l End EndSignal Rev VM Receive VM ID Code 1161 1 A Busv Ovmidc Tow Two MIrtnd Rims5 All Call Page Allowed EKTslDKTsz B3 VM to VM Call Blocking Called...

Page 470: ...receive two muted rings three seconds apart when it receives a call when the telephone is busy If LED 11 is ON the telephone will receive repeated muted rings three seconds apart on an idle ON when called during a busy state If a busy telephone DN is called and there are no idle DN buttons available to ring the telephone will receive two muted rings when the caller activates Busy Override BOV rega...

Page 471: ...s marked with entering a range of ports an X in the table below should be lit Select Port Range Cow this Daae for more Potts PORT PICKUP GROUP LED PICKUP GROUP 20 20 PICKUP GROUP 19 19 PICKUP GROUP 18 18 I PICKUP GROUP 17 17 PICKUP GROUP 10 10 PICKUP GROUP 9 09 PICKUP GROUP 8 08 PICKUP GROUP 7 07 PICKUP GROUP 6 06 Note 7 Specify a range of ports by entering linnmnnrj Low pofi7 High port General No...

Page 472: ...ing 000 1700 LOW porf ll IHigh port Port Ringing Automatic Number Code Preference IOorll DK0207 2 RCTUA RCTUB provides 8 CO line groups RCTU C D provides 16 CO line groups 3 Intercom lowest PDN lowest CO line or Line Group will be selected only if the telephone is not ringing when it is taken off hook or Spkr is pressed If a telephone is ringing Auto Preference of Intercom PDN or outgoing CO line ...

Page 473: ...26 for line groups 1 162 3 for line groups 1 16 2 3 Notes 1 Specify a range of ports by entering q c117 000 Lowport High port DK0208 _ 2 RCTUA and RCTUB provides 8 CO line groups RCTlJ C D provides 16 CO line groups 3 Intercom lowest PDN lowest CO line or Line Group will be selected only if the telephone is not ringing when it is taken off hook or Spkr is pressed If a telephone is ringing Auto Pre...

Page 474: ...197 198 199 200 I 201 i 202 203 204 205 j 206 207 I I I I 208 1 209 I 210 I 211 212 213 1 214 I 215 216 I 217 i 218 219 220 j 221 222 I 223 I I I I I I I 224 225 I 226 1 227 228 229 1 230 1 231 232 233 234 1 235 236 237 238 239 j 4 I I I Notes DK020 1 Specify a range of ports by entering q nomcloo Low porii I High porf 2 The same message center port should also be assigned in Program 13 3 If VM po...

Page 475: ...9 070 i 071 072 073 074 075 076 i 077 i 078 079 I I I I I 1 1 084 085 1 086 087 088 I 089 I 090 I 091 1 092 I 093 094 095 I I I I 1 I 100 1 101 i 102 I 103 104 1 105 106 I 107 108 109 i I 110 111 I I 116 i 117 j 118 119 120 121 I 122 1 123 124 I 125 126 127 I 1 I 132 133 I 134 I 135 136 i 137 I 138 139 140 141 142 143 I 1 I I I 148 149 i 150 151 152 I 153 1 154 155 156 I 157 158 159 II 164 i 165 1...

Page 476: ...N Port 1 I High PhDN Port I 575 I 576 505 I 506 I 577 I 576 507 I 506 I 579 I 560 509 I 510 581 I 582 I 511 I 512 I 583 I 584 513 I 514 t 585 I 586 587 I 588 515 516 I 517 I 518 589 I 590 I 519 I 520 591 592 I 521 I 522 523 I 524 595 I 596 525 I 526 602 I 603 532 I 533 604 I 605 534 I 535 606 607 I DK0211 General Notes l initialized data blanks no data l Use button 01 to enter blanks 1O 60 January...

Page 477: ...07 I 708 I 619 I 664 I I 709 I 710 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 I 711 I 712 c I 623 1 713 I 714 715 I 716 I 627 I I 628 I I 717 I 718 I 674 I I 629 I 630 719 I 720 631 I 632 721 I 722 633 678 I 634 I 679 723 I 724 I 635 636 637 725 I 728 I 638 I 639 683 I 684 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 640 I 685 I 641 686 642 I 687 I 643 688 645 I 646 734 I 735 I 647 I 648 736 I 737 I 649 I I 738 I 739 650...

Page 478: ... or 011 160 See Note 2 208 209 I 210 211 212 213 I 214 215 216 217 i 218 I 219 220 i 221 222 223 I I I I 224 j 225 j 226 1 227 228 I 229 230 231 232 233 1 234 I 235 236 I 237 238 239 I I I I I 1 Notes 1 Enter 000 for no Hold Recall Enter 017 160 for I 1 fo 160 seconds 2 Specify a range of pork by entering r nnj q jr rj Low pori7 L High port General Notes DUO213 For more information see the instruc...

Page 479: ...ng q clu clclcl Low porii r l High port 2 An optional Camp on busy and Busy Override BOV tone burst can be sent to standard telephone handsets headsets LED 01 ON Turn LED 01 OFF for all standard telephone ports connected to voice mail and or auto attendant devices DK0214 General Notes l Initialized data LED 01 ON l Camp on and BOV tone to a standard telephone handset is l Two 160 ms bursts of 1209...

Page 480: ... digital telephones Dial out with or without Toll Restriction must be allowed to use Speed Dial Buttons after answering incoming calls If a CO line is put on hold Toll Restriction will be applied to stations that are restricted when the held line is picked up by a toll restricted station If Dial out with T R is enabled the CO line will drop if a station dials a restricted number after answering an...

Page 481: ...d to when the Fixed Call Forward button is pressed Station Logical Ports 000 239 Note 1 Specify a range of ports by entering clon cIclcI Low portE r L High port General Notes l for more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l lnitializ ed data does not assign a Fixed Call Forward location to any port l Press Button LED 01 to enter blanks l Telephones and attendant consoles m...

Page 482: ...ignments Program 77 3 Tenant Night Ring over External Page Assignments l To operate the NT Lock mode a station must be assigned the appropriate Tenant NT and NT Lock button in Program 39 l All attendant consoles can operate all NT NT Lock buttons if flexible buttons are assigned in Program 59 Program 36 is not required to assign attendant consoles to NT Lock functions l Attendant consoles and stat...

Page 483: ... Enter the Ring Transfer Recall Time Transfer Recall time assigned See Note 1 for in seconds The acceptable range is entering a range of ports 011 999 seconds Use three digits Note 7 Specify a range of ports by entering ll Low port7 I High porf General Notes DKO218 l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l initialized data assigns a Ring Transfer Recall Time of 32 s...

Page 484: ...147 148 149 1 150 1 151 I I 160 j 161 I 162 163 164 I 165 166 i 167 j j 176 177 178 179 180 I 181 j 182 I 183 192 193 i 194 I 195 196 I 197 i 198 i 199 I 208 I 209 i 210 i 211 212 213 I 214 215 I 1 224 225 226 i 227 228 229 1 230 1 231 i 1 I Notes DK0219 1 Use with RCTUA RCTUBA3 RCUT553 or RCTUC RCTUD3 Release 3 or above only 2 Enter 000 for no Park Recall Enter 011 999 for 11 to 999 seconds 3 Spe...

Page 485: ... the appropriate code as follows that needs a keystrip defined See Note 1 for entering a range of ports I I I I I I I Note DK0 220 7 Specify a range of ports by entering jlllll flfl Low poz High port General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initialized data assigns Code 31 to all ports l Always complete Program 38 before proceeding to Program 39 Janua...

Page 486: ...1 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 co5 CO6 co7 CO8 co9 co5 CO6 co7 CO8 co9 co5 CO6 co7 CO8 SD10 lNTor PDNjZCO1 co2 co3 CO4 INTor PDNf CO1 co2 co3 CO4 INTor PDNf CO1 co2 co3 co4 Code 32 Code 33 DK0 221 Code 3 1 Default PO button A 20 button B 20 button C Notes 7 The Speed Dial button is the same as the SDS or REP buttons in previous Strata systems Program 39 Code 97 2 DK280 Release 7 and 2 Intercom INT but...

Page 487: ...135 06 26 46 66 07 27 47 67 08 28 48 68 09 29 49 69 86 106 126 10 30 50 70 87 107 127 88 108 128 89 109 129 90 110 130 01 21 41 61 02 22 42 62 03 23 43 63 04 24 44 64 81 101 121 141 82 102 122 142 83 103 123 143 84 104 124 144 05 25 45 5 85 105 125 1OOO series Digital Telephone DK0222 Notes 1 This button is initialized as SD1 0 with RCTUA since there are only 16 CO lines 2 DK280 Release 1 and 2 In...

Page 488: ...rwd External or CF EXT Call Frwd No Answer or CFNA 460 458 answer Forward calls externally Forwards calls to selected station if station does not answer Call Parks Park in Orbit or PARK R3 464 Call Park Only ICall Park LCD Displays I Park Orbit Dlsplay or CPD R3 I 465 CP Display Button and Mode 64 can be used interchangeably Displays call parked via telephone LCD Call Park and Paaea I I I 1 Call P...

Page 489: ...ine DAY NIGHT ring mode I I I Night Transfer Tenant 43 Night Transfer4 or NT4 e 442 Sets Tenant 4 CO line DAY NIGHT ring mode I I I Night Transfer Lock Tenant l5 Night Lock1 or NT1 Ll 431 Used to lock system ringing mode DAY DAY2 NIGHT See Proarams 74 and 36 for NT Lock Password assignments I I wi Night Transfer Lock Tenant 25 Night Lock2 or NT2 L2 432 Night Transfer Lock Tenant 35 1 Night Lock3 o...

Page 490: ...r future speed dial Begins speed dial selection Reserves button for station speed dial Speed dial number set by station port 000 CO dial signals set to tone or pulse DK0724 3 See Program 15 for Tenant Group assignments 4 Picks up calls to telephones in any call pickup group to which the telephone is assigned in Program 3 1 5 Available with RCTUA3 RCTUBA3 RCTUBB3 or RCTlJC D3 Release 3 or above onl...

Page 491: ...3 next highest the DN that should appear as a Secondary DN YYY should YYY 4 Maximum of same SDN per SDN NNNN 4 Lowest button not be the same port number as the port number XXX of the YYY telephone telephone on which the SDN is assigned NNNN is the actual See Table 1O 3 DN assignment for Port YYY in Program 04 Phantom Directory Numbers PhDN NNNN ZZZ PhDNs See Table 1O 3 ZZZ the Program 04 Port ref ...

Page 492: ...0 DNs SDN buttons are actually PDNs that appear on felephones other than the PDNs owner telephone l Phantom DN owner telephones have the following attributes l Sef Call Forward for PhDNs l Set Call Forward Mail Box destinations VM ID codes for PhDNs l Receive Message Waiting indication for up to four Phantom Directory Numbers on individual PhDNIMW button LEDs When off hook the PhDN telephone owner...

Page 493: ...l 47 This button will signal the station number programmed in Speed Dial 46 This button will signal the station number programmed in Speed Dial 45 Alert Signal Button Programming Example Station 200 Station 202 Code 427 SD 48 202 Signal 1 Station 201 Code 427 SD 48 203 IMPORTANT 1 Both partner stations must have the same Alert Signal button number programmed in Program 39 and the appropriate Speed...

Page 494: ...tation Number Station Number Alert Signal Button Number Speed Dial Alert Signal Button 01 20 Number Button Partner Number Code Station Number 1 427 48 2 428 47 3 429 46 4 430 45 Station Number 1 427 4a 2 428 47 3 1 429 46 4 1 430 45 J Station Number I Alert Signal Button I Buy ber Alert Signal Button Button Number Speed Dial Alert Signal 01 20 Number Button Partner Station Number I Station Number ...

Page 495: ...r more telephones Pot t Numb i 08 18 I I I I PORT NO 100 LCDO 100 LCD0 200 DIU 0 PORT NO 200 DIU 0 PORT NO 100 LCD0 200 DIU 0 LOCATION I Code PORT NO PORT NO 100 LCD0 100 LCD0 2OU DIU q 2OU DIU q 1 1 B B PORT NO 100 LCD0 200 DIU q LOCATION January 1996 1 n 79 ...

Page 496: ...Programs 40 through 48 are in the Toll Restriction System Record Section Programs 50 through 56 are in the least Cost Routing System Record Section I 1O 80 January 1996 ...

Page 497: ...lease 3 7 and above 2 When editing the data field use button LED 01 to delete a member DK0230 General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initialized data does r tot assign any member station port to any DH number I l To assign voice mail ports to a DH group see the example following the Program 31 record sheet l See Program 3 1 for Voice Mail programmin...

Page 498: ...1000 2391 Notes 1 Distributed Hunt is available with DK280 Release 3 1 and above 2 When editing the data field use button LED 07 to delete a member DK0 231 General Notes l for more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initialized data does not assign any member station port to any DH number l To assign voice mail ports to a DH group see the example following the Program 3...

Page 499: ......

Page 500: ...RDTU 1 6 w RDTU Channel No Line Type 07 08 09 10 11 12 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 I 17 20 21 22 23 z 24 E 8 IMPORTANT 1 See Program 17 for other tie DID assignments see Program 17 and Program U9 for other DID assignments 2 System power must be cycled or Program 91 2 must be run to transfer Program Ml 2 data from temporary memory to working memory Program 91 2 is available with Release 3 and abo...

Page 501: ...of the following pads codes for the transmission path 1 6 decibel dB oad 2 3dBpad I PAD Code Program 41 4 Tl Span Receive Level Pad Assignments SELECT 4 _I L J Enter one of the following pads for Enter the RDTU being programmed 1 6 the reception path 1 6 decibel dB pad 2 3 dB Dad L PAD Code DKO234 January 1996 1 O 85 ...

Page 502: ...ource 2 Press button 01 Blank if the DK280 Tl is the master free run clock source 3 Notes 1 RDTU No 1 is the RDTU PCB installed in the lowest slot number of all RDTlJ PCBs RDTU No 2 is the RDTU PCB installed in the next highest slot number of all RDTUs and so on 2 Example of Primary Back Up assignments Program 42 l Program 42 2 Data 01 Data q 2 DK280 p Span Line RDTU in Tl Primary PCB Primary cloc...

Page 503: ...I 135 I 100 1Xi 101 137 102 138 103 139 104 140 105 141 106 142 107 143 108 144 Notes 1 RCTUA 16 lines maximum RCTUBA3 RCTUBB3 48 lines maximum RCTUC D 144 lines maximum 2 Any Caller ID circuit can be assigned to any analog ground or loop start CO line circuit Circuit numbers do not have to match 3 System power must be cycled or Program 91 2 must be run after completing ti0 data entry to transfer ...

Page 504: ...elephone or the called Phantom Directory Number PhDN owner telephone Transferred Caller ID and or ANI line abandoned call numbers will be stored in the transferred to telephone memory if that telephone is assigned memory in this program see Program 62 Call forwarded Caller ID and or ANI line abandoned call numbers will be stored in the PDN or PhDN owner telephone memory if that telephone is assign...

Page 505: ..._ 239 Console overflow destination Note 1 Use with RCTUB2 or RCTU C D Release 2 or above only General Notes l Calls that will overflow include ring transfer CO line incoming dial 0 and Attd Call button calls Ring Transfer recall and Hold recall will not overflow l Overflow recall time is set in Program 58 7 DKQ240 January 1996 10 91 ...

Page 506: ...s Directory Number assigned in Program 04 it supports incoming calls only and can only appear once on a console Copy as required for more consoles Attendant Console No Left Buttons 1 l 2 fafy j h j hiii jIbI hi lEJ Right Buttons l 12 k6 jly l Attendant Console No Left Buttons l 12 Right Buttons l 1 2 fii lfiJlhI m6 jlq l mfi 1 Initialized Data Left Buttons 1 12 Right Buttons 1 12 Split 295 Join Lo...

Page 507: ...ns Attd Call In DN4 262 261 260 259 258 000 257 Dial 0 calls ring in on this button Emergency calls ring in on this button INT 400 No answer transferred calls recall on this button Held calls recall on this button Receive call transfer Can originate calls on this button The Attendant Call LED is lit red any time the attendant talk path is connected R3 LI Incoming calls to the console DN ring on th...

Page 508: ...EXT 1 460 1 Forward calls externally Call Foward No Answer I I I Call Frwd No Answer or CFNA 458 Forwards calls to selected station if station does not answer Call Parks Park in Orbit or PARK 464 Call Park LCD Displays Park Orbit Dlsplay or CPD 465 Call Park and Pages Call Park Page or CPlPG 463 Call Park Only R3 CP Display Button and Mode 64 can be used interchangeably Displays call parked via te...

Page 509: ...sh Msg Wait Flash or MW FL 499 Provides message waiting LED for EKT and Flash Button Modem Modem or MODEM 455 Used to reserve modem in modem pool Night Transfer Tenant 1 3 Night Transfer1 or NT1 439 Sets Tenant 1 CO line DAY NIGHT ring mode Night Transfer Tenant 23 Night Transfer2 or NT2 440 Sets Tenant 2 CO line DAY NIGHT ring mode Night Transfer Tenant 33 Night Transfer3 or NT3 441 Sets Tenant 3...

Page 510: ...s 1 Some assignments are not available in Release 1 or 2 490 CO dial signals set to tone or pulse DKO224 2 Specify a range of ports by keying in q clcl c1ncl Low potK I High port 3 See Program x75 for Tenant Group assignments 4 Picks up calls to telephones in any call pickup group to which the telephone is assigned in Program 3 1 5 Available with RCTUA3 RCTUBA3 RCTUBB3 or RCTUQ D3 Release 3 or abo...

Page 511: ...e data will be sent from the system system SMDR pot l SMDR port Note Note DK0244 DK0244 1 1 LED 01 determines which data will be sent out the SMOR port this data is output on the last 75digit right LED 01 determines which data will be sent out the SMOR port this data is output on the last 75digit right hand field columns of the SMDR print out see Figure 6 20 in Chapter 6 Peripheral installation of...

Page 512: ... only q Dial l O calls only 5 q Dial 1 or 00 calls only TOLL DIAL DATA q DISA Security Code 01 15 digits may be changed from station per Program 30 I DATA q n Credit card call digit length 01 3O digits see Program 43 I CREDIT5 ri rl Notes 1 Selection 3 printout outgoing call only is stilt available 2 Button 01 blank Button 02 is a wild card can be any digit from 1 9 3 If a security code is not pro...

Page 513: ...l Initialized data is no digits l Press button 01 to enter blanks erase data l CF EXT ID code must be assigned to a telephone to allow callers to change the Call Forward External destination of that telehone from a remote location by calling in on a DISA CO line Call Forward applies to call directed to Primary Directory Numbers but not to Phantom Directory Numbers l Button 01 blank Button 02 is a ...

Page 514: ...de station users must always dial the quantity of digits defineo in Program 60 4 l If the quantity of digits in a Verified Account Code is the same as the Account Code digit length in Program 60 4 then all digits will be Verified if the quantity of digits is less then only those digits will be verified Stations must have LED 14 ON in Program 30 to use Verified Account Codes l Account Codes may not...

Page 515: ... an Account Code station users must always dial the quantity of digits defined in Program 60 4 l If the quantity of digits in a Verified Account Code is the same as the Account Code digit length in Program 60 4 then all digits will be Verified if the quantity of digits is less then only those digits wit be verified Stations must have LED 14 ON in Program 30 to use Verified Account Codes l Account ...

Page 516: ...ial an Account Code station users must always dial the quantity of digits defineb in Program 60 4 l If the quantity of digits in a Verified Account Code is the same as the Account Code digit length in Program 60 4 then all digits will be Verified if the quantity of digits is less then only those digits will be verified Stations must have LED 14 ON in Program 30 to use Verified Account Codes l Acco...

Page 517: ...lass 51 Enter 04 for Class 2 T R Enter 08 for Class 6 Enter 05 for 3 T R Enter 09 for Class Class 71 Enter 06 for Class 4 T R Enter 10 for Class 8 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 99 Note 1 With DK280 Release 1 2 and 3 RCTUA RCTUBA BB and RCTUB provide Classes 1 4 RCTU C D provide Classes 1 8 General Notes l Initialized data reads 000 for all VACNs when stations enter VACs they will be unrestricted l This ...

Page 518: ...ntenance Modem RCTU C3 D3 PIOU RSIU Maintenance Modem RCTU BA BB PIOWRSIU Maintenance Modem RCTU A3 ACD Group 01 16 RCTU C3 D3 ACD Group 01 08 RCTU BA BB All Call External Page See Prg 17 LED 01 should be ON for private network Tie line only Ringing over PIOU PIOUS PEPU external page output Network Table Number See Prg 72 Program 71 4 DNIS Number and ANI Only Lines Voice Mail VM ID Assignments R3 ...

Page 519: ...ss 000 039 See previous programming instructions 002 I 004 005 006 I I 007 006 009 I I 010 011 012 I I 013 I I I I I I 015 I I 016 017 018 019 020 021 I 023 1 I 024 025 026 1 I 027 028 029 I I 030 032 1 035 I 036 037 038 039 I I DKO353 January 1996 I n i ne ...

Page 520: ...DNIS ANI DID Tie line Assignment Record Sheet DNIS Address 040 079 See previous programming instructions 075 076 077 078 079 OK0354 1O l 06 lanllarv 1aac ...

Page 521: ...DNIS ANI DID Tie Line Assignment Record Sheet DNIS Address 080 119 See previous programming instructions 1 16 characters DK035 January 1996 I n i n7 ...

Page 522: ... DNIS ANI DID Tie Line Assignment Record Sheet DNIS Address 120 159 See previous programming instructions 1 DNIS 1 DNISNUMBER 1 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 157 158 DK0356 ...

Page 523: ...s 160 199 See previous programming instructions DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER NAME 166 I I I I I 167 I 168 169 170 171 172 173 I I 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 191 192 193 194 I 195 196 I 197 198 199 RClUA3 END DK03157 January 1996 4n nn ...

Page 524: ...s programming instructions DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER NAME DNIS DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER NAME ADDRESS 1 5 digits Routing Points 71 1 2 3 VM ID CODE 1 16 digits 1 16 characters 71 O 1 2 3 71 4 714 200 201 I 239 I I I I I 1 DK0358 DK0358 ...

Page 525: ...structions DNIS DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER NAME ADDRESS 1 5 digits Routing Points 71 1 2 3 VM ID CODE 1 16 digits 1 16 characters 71 O 1 2 3 71 4 71 5 240 241 242 243 244 DK03 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 I I 259 260 261 262 263 264 275 276 277 278 279 59 January 1996 in 111 ...

Page 526: ...nstructions II DNIS NUMBER I DNIS NUMBER I DNIS NUMBER NAME I DNIS DNIS NUMBEF ADDRESS 1 I 5 digits Routing Points 71 1 2 3 VM ID CODE 1 16 digits 1 16 characters 71 O 1 2 3 71 4 71 5 280 281 282 283 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 I 294 I I I I I I 1 I I 295 296 297 298 299 I 300 I OK0360 ...

Page 527: ...revious programming instructions DNIS ADDRESS 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER NAME 1 5 digits Routing Points 71 1 2 3 VM ID CODE 1 16 digits 1 16 characters 71 O 1 1 2 1 3 71 4 71 5 I 1 1 I DK031 January 1996 1 n 1 17 ...

Page 528: ...DNlS ANl DiD Tie line Assignment Record Sheet DNIS Address 360 399 See previous programming instructions 361 362 363 364 365 366 381 382 383 1 384 1 I I 389 390 391 395 I I I 396 I I 10 114 _ ...

Page 529: ...MBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER NAME DNIS NUMBER NAME ADDRESS 1 5 digits Routing Points 71 1 2 3 VM ID CODE 1 16 digits VM ID CODE 1 16 digits 1 16 characters 71 O 1 2 3 71 4 71 5 400 401 402 403 404 415 416 417 416 1 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 437 436 439 DKOBE DKOBE January 1996 ...

Page 530: ... NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER NAME DNIS DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER NAME ADDRESS 1 5 digits Routing Points 71 1 2 3 VM ID CODE 1 16 digits 1 16 characters 71 O 1 1 2 3 71 4 71 5 440 I I 442 443 445 446 448 449 451 452 453 455 I I I 456 I I I 476 477 478 479 OK036 OK036 lo 116 ...

Page 531: ...digits 71 O 71 O 1 480 480 1 1 1 481 481 I I DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER Routing Points 71 1 2 3 Routing Points 71 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 I I I DNIS NUMBER DNIS NUMBER VM ID CODE 1 18 digits VM ID CODE 1 16 digits 71 4 71 4 DNIS NUMBER NAME DNIS NUMBER NAME 1 16 characters 1 16 characters 71 5 71 5 1 484 i 485 486 487 488 489 I 490 I I 491 492 493 495 496 1 498 1 January 1996 ...

Page 532: ......

Page 533: ...BER assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 011 011 012 012 013 013 014 014 015 015 f 016 016 7 017 017 018 018 019 019 020 020 3 z 021 021 I 8 022 022 s r 023 023 tz 024 024 z 025 025 ii 1 026 026 z 027 027 E 028 028 E E 029 029 ii I 030 030 is 031 031 032 032 033 033 034 034 035 035 036 036 037 037 038 038 039 039 040 040 041 041 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are ca...

Page 534: ...ng The DN button must be NUMBER assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 042 042 043 043 044 044 045 045 046 046 047 047 048 048 049 049 050 050 051 051 052 052 053 053 054 054 055 055 056 056 057 057 058 058 059 059 060 060 061 061 062 062 063 063 064 064 065 065 066 066 067 067 068 068 069 069 070 070 071 071 072 072 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called DK0368 No...

Page 535: ... REFERENCE DN or a tie or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be NUMBER assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 073 073 I 074 074 I 075 075 I 076 076 077 077 1 078 078 i 079 079 080 080 083 083 084 084 085 085 086 086 087 087 088 088 089 089 090 090 091 091 092 092 093 093 I I J Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called DK0369 ...

Page 536: ...when the DN is called from another DN or a tie or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 1112 113 114 11 5 1116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called No telephones are assigned to r...

Page 537: ...UMBER assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 135 135 I 136 136 I 137 137 136 136 139 139 140 140 I 141 141 142 142 143 143 144 144 145 145 a I A t 8 140 14b 2 147 147 148 148 8 149 5 149 150 150 z z 151 151 e z 152 152 B 153 153 2 is 154 154 E 155 155 156 156 157 157 158 158 159 159 160 160 161 161 162 162 163 163 164 164 165 165 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are cal...

Page 538: ...the telephones that should ring when the DN is called from another DN or a tie or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 166 167 168 1169 170 171 172 173 174 1175 176 177 178 179 180 1181 182 183 184 485 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called...

Page 539: ... telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 204 205 205 206 206 207 207 208 208 209 210 211 212 213 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called DK0373 No telephones are assigned to ring when PhDNs are called default setting 209 210 211 212 213 I 214 214 215 215 216 216 217 217 218 218 2...

Page 540: ...r REFERENCE DN or a tie or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be NUMBER assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 1 228 228 229 229 230 230 I 231 I 231 232 232 233 233 234 234 I 235 235 1 236 236 237 237 238 238 239 239 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called DK0374 No telephones are assigned to ring when PhDNs are called defa...

Page 541: ... called from another REFERENCE DN or a tie or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be NUMBER assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 517 518 519 520 521 522 s 523 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called DK0375 No telephones are assigned to ring when PhDNs are called default setting January 1996 lo 127 ...

Page 542: ... line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be NUMBER assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 548 549 550 551 I 552 I 553 554 555 I 558 I 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 1 I 568 572 573 574 575 576 1 577 578 i Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called DK0376 No telephones are assigned to ring when PhDNs are called default sett...

Page 543: ... or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 579 580 581 582 583 584 I f 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called DK0377 No telephones are assigned to ring when PhDNs are called default sett...

Page 544: ...tie or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called No telephones are assigned to ring when PhDNs are called default setting DK02...

Page 545: ... maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be NUMBER assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 641 642 643 644 I I 645 646 647 I 648 649 650 651 652 I I 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 I I Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called OK0379 No telephones are assigned to ring when PhDNs are called default...

Page 546: ...ogram 04 telephone ports of the telephones that should ring when the DN is called from another DN or a tie or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called DK0380 No telephones are assigned to ring when PhDNs are called default setting lo 132 January 199...

Page 547: ...or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 1 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 I Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called DK0381 No telephones are assigned to ring when PhDNs are called default setti...

Page 548: ... ring when the DN is called from another DN or a tie or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be assioned Proaram 39 to the t DhOne that should rina I 8 734 i 1 735 8 s 736 Default telephones assigned to ring when PDNs are called DK0382 No telephones are assigned to ring when PhDNs are called default setting 1o 1 34 January 1996 ...

Page 549: ...hone Number Network Table Number Ground I Loop I Tie I DID Line Access Code and Network Telephone Number 305 308 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 318 317 318 354 319 355 320 358 321 357 322 358 323 359 324 380 325 381 328 382 327 383 328 384 329 I I 331 332 333 334 335 385 388 387 I 388 1 I 389 370 371 Note DK0383 1 Any type line can be accessed Ground Loop tie and or DID to send a DNIS call ba...

Page 550: ...er 300 599 Line Access Code and Network Telephone Number 1 27 digits Press Button 03 to enter jGJ Press Button 02 to enter a Press Button 04 to enter Pausel Note 1 Any type line can be accessed ground loop tie and or DID to send a DNIS call back out over the telephone network General Notes initialized Data blank DNIS network calls are timed bv Prooram 12 disconnect timer lo 136 January 1996 ...

Page 551: ...etwork Telephone Number 450 489 451 490 452 491 453 I II 492 I 454 493 455 I II 494 I 4Sfi 495 457 496 458 497 459 496 460 499 I 462 I I I 501 I 463 502 464 503 465 504 466 505 I I I I I 467 II 506 I I 468 I II 507 I t 469 1 11 508 1 470 509 471 510 472 511 473 512 475 I II 514 I 476 515 477 516 478 517 479 518 480 519 481 520 482 521 483 522 I 484 I II 523 I I 485 I 524 1 487 I II 526 488 527 I N...

Page 552: ...mber 1 27 digits Press Button 03 to enter B Press Button 02 to enterm Press Button 04 to enter Network Telephone Number Network Telephone Number Note 1 Any type line can be accessed ground loop tie and or DID to send a DNIS call back out over the telephone network Genera Notes I Initialized Data blank DNlS nefwork calls are timed by Program 12 disconnect timer DK0366 1 o 1 38 January 1996 ...

Page 553: ...er External Page Assignments l To operate the NT Lock mode a station must be assigned the appropriate Tenant NT and NT Lock button in Program 39 and must be assigned as the designated NT Lock Station in Program ti6 l All attendant consoles can operate all NT NT Lock buttons if flexible buttons are assigned in Program 59 Program 36 is not required to assign attendant consoles to NT Lock functions 8...

Page 554: ... or an RS 232 administration maintenance TTYport LED 14 OFF For modem operation a RMDS piggy back PCB is required for RS 232 TTYport an RSIU RSIS or RMDS PCB may be used 3 The transmission data rate sum of the equipped RSIU RSISI RMDS port can not exceed 9600 bps 4 System power must be cycled or Program 91 2 must be run to transfer Program 76 1 data entries from temporary memory to working memory ...

Page 555: ... PDKU RDSV PEKU or PESV port number to operate DDCB to PDKV or RDSV and HDCB to PEKV or PESV See Program 79 and 79 for door phone ringing assignments 2 If a modem unit RMDSIMDV is installed it can be accessed by dialing Station I9 and can be assigned a DID extension number in Program I9 or in Program 71 1 3 3 The door phone will ring over external page if the DK system is in the NiGHT mode 4 This ...

Page 556: ...e below 04 DDCBi HDCBl B jack is Lock Control l B is connected to Door Phone 1B 03 Door phone 1C Busy Out No Busy Signal 02 Door phone 1B Busy Out No Busy Signal 01 Door phone 1A Busy Out No Busy Signal General Notes DK0390 l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF DDCB and HDCB Port Assignments January 1996 ...

Page 557: ...h the zone entered page zone relay 1 4 in the preceding step TENANT I ZONE 1 TENANT 1 CO Lines I TENANT 2 CO Lines ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 DKO391 Note 1 These assignments apply to ground and loop start lines only they do not apply to DID and tie lines General Note l Initialized all zones l 4 assigned to tenant 1 i January 1996 1 o 1 43 ...

Page 558: ... table below General Notes DK0392 l initialized data leaves all LEDs OFF l LED 07 and 02 may be ON or OFF in any combination Always set LED 07 or 02 OFF when it is not required to send Caller ID ANI DNIS information l RCTU PCB requires RKYS4 to provide MIS caller ID ANI and DN information via the system O A port 1o 1 44 January 1996 ...

Page 559: ...ring NIGHT Mode I j I I 1 I 1 i 1 j 1 1 i 1 j 1 1 1 Auto Attendant during DAY Mode3 Auto Attendant during DAY Mode3 i 1 I i 1 I II l 1 l 1 j j j j 6 6 2 2 Auto Attendant during DAY2 Mode3 Auto Attendant during DAY2 Mode3 I I j j i i 3 3 Auto Attendant during NIGHT Mode3 Auto Attendant during NIGHT Mode3 1 I I I I 1 I I I I iI iI I i I i Notes Notes DK0393 DK0393 7 7 To turn all CO LEDs on or off a...

Page 560: ...ing DP8 08 _ ___ __ Door phone 3A Ring DP7 07 __ Door phone 2C Ring DP6 06 _____ __ Door phone 2B Ring DP5 05 Door phone 2A Ring DP4 04 Door phone 1C Ring DP3 03 Door phone 1B Ring DP2 02 Door phone 1A Ring DPl 01 DP Door Phone DK0394 Note 1 Specify a range of ports may by entering q 0cl 0 23cl Low poti L High port General Notes l Initialized data does not assign door phone ringing to any station ...

Page 561: ...o Program 04 1 DOOR PHONE NUMBER LOCATION DOOR PHONE BOX NUMBER DN PORT REFERENCE NUMBER 1 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 1 5 2 2 6 3 7 1 8 3 2 9 3 10 1 11 4 2 12 3 DK0395 General Notes l Initialized data no DNs assigned to ring for all door phones l See Program 77 1 for door phone control box port assignments IMPORTANT To allow a door phone to flash and ring a DN the DN must be assigned to flash in Program 79 and...

Page 562: ...Tone 3 3 i cm Ringing lone Port Numbers 120 159 Code 120 121il22 123 1241251126 127128 129 130 1311132 1331341351136 137138 1391140 141 142 1431144145 146 147i148 149150 1511152 153 154 155 156 157 158159 Tone l 1 j I 1 r I A _ _ Tone2 2 j i J _ _ J _ _ Tone 3 3 b Ringing Tone Port Numbers 160 199 Code 160161ll62163 1641651166167 168169 170171 172 173174175il76177 178 179 160181 16 2163ii64i65 186...

Page 563: ...e telephones or DH Groups use Programs 81 84 and 87 to cause CO lines to flash the appropriate PDN and or PhDN buttons as required If the CO line or Pooled Line button appears on a telephone do not use Programs 81 84 or 87 to assign ON LEDs to flash this will cause both the CO line and DN button to flash on the telephone when the CO line rings on an incoming call 3 CO lines that must ring DH group...

Page 564: ... ring stations in Program 81 but no stations are assigned in Program 82 or 83 the AA will answer the call immediate y no delay ring 2 12 Second Delay If AA line s are assigned to ring stations in Programs 81 and 82 but no stations are assigned in Program 83 stations assigned in Program 8 1 will ring immediately for 12 seconds and then the AA will answer stations assigned in Program 82 will not rin...

Page 565: ...ons to ring Assign PhDN 500 button on this port using Program 39 5 Assign lines 00 I w 005 to flash PhDN 500 in Program W 6 Assign the PhDN 500 button to station 200 and 208 using Program 39 7 Using Program 39 assign PhDN button 500 on all station ports assigned to ring in Programs I 81 82 and 83 Attendant Console Load Sharing 1 Assign all CO lines ground loop and DID that should alternately ring ...

Page 566: ...g If a CO line is assigned to flash a Directory Number DN in this program the assigned DN LED will f ash as 1 Hz rate when the CO line rings into the DK280 use Program 81 89 to assign the telephones equipped with the DN to ring as required IMPORTANT if CO lines direct ring VM ports in Program 81 89 the data in Programs j81 84 and 87 must be blank The CO line that is assigned to flash a DN in Progr...

Page 567: ...sh a DN in this program the assigned DN LED will flash as 1 Hz rate when the CO line rings into the DK280 use Program 81 89 to assign the telephones equipped with the DN to ring as required IMPORTANT If CO ines direct ring VM ports via Program 87 89 the data in Programs w l 4 and x87 must be blank The CO line that is assigned to flash a DN in Program Ml W and 7 should also be assigned to ring the ...

Page 568: ...ms W4 and 87 2 Program 81 CO Line to Station Ringing Control Logic also Applies to Programs 82 89 Ground Loop Start incoming Call Ringing Control 4 Y DN 1 HZ I LA N b Strata DK280 Release 3 CO line Button Directory Number DN Button Ringing Control Logic Diagram 1 o 1 54 January 1996 ...

Page 569: ... Red Figure 1O 2 Strata DK280 Release 3 CO Line Button Directory Number LED Flash Control Logic Diagram Telephone CO Line Button LED I Called Green Telephone DN Button LED I Called Green DK0401 System Record Sheets for Programs 90 91 and 92 appear in the beginning of this section because they must be executed prior to running any other programs 5 January 1996 1o 1 55 ...

Page 570: ...01 1121 140 141 144 Copy this page for more trunks 08 I I 07 I I 06 I 1 05 I 04 I I 03 I I I I 02 1 I 1 i 01 j i 20 I I I 19 I 18 I I 17 16 I 15 14 j I 13 12 11 I I I 10 I i I I I 09 1 I I 08 I 07 I I I I 1 06 i I 1 I I I 05 i I I I I 04 i 03 1 I I 1 02 j I i I 1 I I _ 01 I I Notes DK0402 7 To advance the line range press the Scroll button beneath the LCD Press the Page button for a lower range 2 ...

Page 571: ... Use button to switch to Alpha Mode Alpha Mode Moves cursor to right and starts special character entry when in the Alpha Mode Moves cursor to left 171 Isl 191 Cursor Scroll Mode Left Key Key El ml m Alpha Entry Example A I 2 6 20 csla zoo T l Alpha Entry Character Sequence Scrolls alpha and special characters Special Character Entry Q 8 1 0 2 1 0 0 6fJ 1 0 0 0 I w 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 P ed 1 0 0...

Page 572: ... Note 1 for entering Cancels printout a range of programs at any time DATA PRINT Printout begins Note 1 Speciv a range of programs by entering 17ouoo II I High program in range Low program in range General Note l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets DK0811 1o 1 58 January 1996 ...

Page 573: ... il Restriction System Record Sheets Programs 40 48 lanuary 1996 1 o 1 59 ...

Page 574: ...his oaae for more CO lines and oorts _1 PORTS t CO Line1 LED __ 1 _J I I I I I I I I DK0404 KElElo LOW port L High port 2 To turn all CO LEDs on or off after the port number and is entered press the VolA all LEDs on or Volv all LEDs off To check a particular CO line after the port number is entered press Mode and enter the CO line number then use the button to display and advance General Notes l I...

Page 575: ...RTS I I I I I I I I I Lowpoti 1 l High port 2 To turn all CO LEDs on or off after the port number is entered press the VolA all LEDs on or VOW all LEDs off To check a particular CO line after the port number is entered press Mode and enter the CO line number then use the button to display and advance 3 To not allow a CO line to be accessed for DISA or external call forward turn its LED ON for port...

Page 576: ... LEDs on or off after the port numbercode is entered press the VolA a l LEDs on or Volv a LEDs off To check a particular CO line after the port number is entered press Mode and enter the CO line number then use the button to display and advance General Notes l Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF for all CO lines This program must be utilized to allow Centrex PBX atier flash features to operate If ...

Page 577: ...s entered press the VolA all LEDs on or Volv all LELJs off To check a particular GO line after the port number is entered press Mode and enter the GO line number then use the button to display and advance General Notes Initialized data reads all LEOs OFF for all CO lines This program enables Centrex PBX after flash features to operate If CO line is programmed for behind GentrexPBX LED ON reseize g...

Page 578: ...igit and press Button LED 01 as second digit l Press Button L ED 0 I to delete a digit l Press Button LED 02 for don t care For example pressing 8 Button LED 02 allows 80 89 General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initialized data assigns no access codes to PBX goups l Use this program to allow correct Toll Restriction and CentretiPBX transfer operat...

Page 579: ...record sheet for more CO lines and ports PORTS J I I I I I I I I I CO line LED 20 __ _ __ ___ _ _ _ 19 _ 1R Notes UK DY 1 To advance the CO line range press the Scroll button beneath the LCD Press the Page button for a lower range 2 To turn a CO LEDs on or off after the port number is entered press the VoIA a LEDs on or VOW a LEDs off To check a particular CO line after the port number is entered ...

Page 580: ... q nnn q uuu q uun L DATA 1 to 4 Digit Code General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l C asses 7 8 are defined in Program 46 4 When the Toll Restriction Override code is dialed the station s class defined in Program 48 will change to the class assigned to the code in Program 44 1 8 l Do not use same codes set in Program 45 8 and 9 l Stations enabled in ...

Page 581: ... CO line access codes must be programmed in front of the emergency telephone number Example If the CentretiPBX access code is 9 then enter 991 I in Program 44 91 93 General Notes l The emergency telephone numbers assigned in this program will be sent out to the CO line immediate y when dialed they wili bypass the Forced Verified Account Code dialing restriction l If Verified Account Codes assigned...

Page 582: ...ction properly Notes 1 0 and universal Codes 5 and 4 are not used in USA 2 For UK only General Notes Initialized data assigns Dial Plan 7 to the system with Release 3 and above software and Dial Plan 1 with Release 1 and 2 software l The DK280 will restrict direct dialing of 1OXXX 1 and 1OXXXXX 1 access codes These codes are allowed in system speed dial and LCR modified digit tables This is necess...

Page 583: ...table below All LEDs with an x should be lit when finished ON Disable Toll Restriction 02 1 002 1 01 1 001 1 Note DK0413 1 To turn all CO LEDs on or off press the VolA all LEDs on or Vol lr all LEDs off General Notes l To advance the CO line range press the Scroll button beneath the LCD Press the Page button for a lower range l Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF for all CO lines all lines will ap...

Page 584: ...e Toll Restriction LED Trunk X 1 I 04 I 144 I I 1 1 03 03 143 143 02 02 142 142 01 ni 141 141 20 140 19 139 139 18 18 138 138 17 17 137 137 15 1 135 1 IA 1 134 i 13 1 133 1 12 1 132 1 06 126 05 125 04 124 03 123 02 122 01 121 Note DK0414 1 To turn all CO LEDs on or off press the VolA all LEDs on or VOW all LEDs off General Notes l To advance the CO line range press the Scroll button beneath the LC...

Page 585: ...and 6 and assigns blank data to Items 3 and 5 l Do not enter a digit length greater than necessary or users may be able to override Toll Restriction l This program is designed for the following Special Common Carrier SPCC access dialing sequence SPCC Number Telephone Number t CREDIT CARD Authorization Code This program requires only the first five digifs of the SPCC Number 95OXXXX SMDR will print ...

Page 586: ...ion see the instructions preceding the record sheets l When editing the data field use Button LED 07 to delete a digit Button LED 02 to allow all digits to work l Initialized data leaves code assignments blank l Codes may be revised by station users specified in Program 30 Button LED 09 l Do not use same 4 digit codes set in Program 44 1 8 Toll Restriction Traveling Class 1 8 Override codes Progra...

Page 587: ...ral Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l When editing the data field use Button LED 01 to delete a digit l Initialized data assigns the first office code 976 to be restricted for all area codes The other three office codes to be restricted are left blank l This table applies to all staions with Program 48 TR Codes 03 10 only TR classes l 8 not to stations...

Page 588: ...ss codes or extension numbers to bypass toll restrication and route over the local LCR route if using LCR Toll Restriction will always be applied after dialing the special numbers assigned to this table EXAMPLE If using LCR behind assume 9 Centrex and restricted stations 1 AC not allowed must dial 12XX and 13XX as Centrex station numbers is the Centrex suffix for extensions Enter mm mb and MRIBuff...

Page 589: ...al CO or Centrex access codes that begin with the or prefix Assign them in this table if it is required to bypass Toll Restriction and or route over the local LCR route if using LCR T R options 0 N2 will be applied after dialing the special numbers assigned in this table EXAMPLE 1 If using LCR behind Centrex and you must dial Centrex speed dial numbers 700 799 enter 14 1 IFI in Program 45 31 In th...

Page 590: ...e entered low Area I High Area J LDenotes end of string Code Code 2 Several ranges or individual area codes may be entered by separating them with the button General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l initialized data includes all area codes in all classes l Tables with deny box checked do not represent memory All area codes in memory are allowed l Inte...

Page 591: ......

Page 592: ...memory See Notes 1 and 2 8 display allowed codes 7 In memory Notes 1 A range of office codes can be entered by prksing uunmuuu uucl cluu Low Anigh AT T notes end of string Code Code 2 Several ranges or individual office codes may be entered by separating them with the button General Notes l Initialized data includes all office codes in memory in all classes allowed l Tables with deny box checked d...

Page 593: ...splay allowed codes inmemory Class 161 Allowed 0 Off ice Codes Denied 0 Check one Notes 1 A range of office codes can be entered by pr sing cl clao n oooonoo DK0423 Low Area J High Area J LDenotes end of string Code Code 2 Several ranges or individual office codes may be entered by separating them with the button General Notes l Initialized data includes all office codes in memory in all classes a...

Page 594: ...Program 48 EXAMPLE If LED 04 is ON 17 will be restricted when the is dialed but 17 5 1 will be allowed because the comes after the fourth digit dialed General Notes l Initialized Data all LEDs off l With DK280 Release 1 2 and 3 RCTLJA RCTlJBA BB and RCTUB provides Classes 1 4 RCTU C D provides C asses 7 8 l Numbers set in Program 45 2X will override the Fk restriction function of Program 46 1 O 80...

Page 595: ... 08 Area Office Exception Not Selected Not Selected Not Selected 07 Table 07 Area Office Exception 06 Table 06 Area Office Exception 05 Table 05 Area Off ice Exception Not Selected Not Selected Not Selected 04 1 Table 04 Area Office Exception Not Selected I 03 I 02 I I Table 03 Area Office Exception Table 02 Area Office Exception I Not Selected Not Selected I 01 I Table 01 Area Office Exception No...

Page 596: ...le 01 16 q Area Code Exception Table 01 16 0 Area Code 000 I I Notes 1 Only one area code may be entered per exception table I DK0426 2 To enter a range of office codes key in Low Office Code h Or enotes end of string 3 Several ranges or individual office codes maybe Code entered separating them button General Notes l for more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initiali...

Page 597: ...nd 0 or 1 as 1st digit 3 Enter 03 for C s 1 T R Enter 07 for Class 5 Enter 04 for Class 2 T R Enter 08 for Class 6 Enter 05 for Class 3 T R Enter 09 for Class 7 Notes lass 8 DK0427 7 A range ofports may be entered nnnmnnrl Low poti L High port 2 Toll Restriction Classification Ports for DISA calls are Port 039 RCTUA Port 089 RCTUB and RCTUBA BB and Port 249 for RCTU C D 3 If dial 0 credit card cal...

Page 598: ...triction and 0 or 1 as 1st digit 3 L L Enter 03 for Class 1 T R Enter 07 for Class 5 Enter 04 for Class 2 T R Enter 08 for Class 6 Enter 05 for Class 3 T R Enter 09 for Class 7 Enter 06 for Class 4 T R Enter 10 for Class 8 I DKO428 Notes 1 Specify a range of ports by entering q 17cl cl00 Low porii l High port 2 Toll Restriction Classification Ports for DISA calls are Port 039 RCTUA Port 089 RCTUB ...

Page 599: ...Least Co Routing System Record Sheets y 7 I _ _ r __ Programs 50 56 January 1996 ...

Page 600: ...line access to stations using LCR for outgoing calls 3 Use Program 41 to deny outgoing CO line access except for LCR access IMPORTANT Area code and office code structure must be defined by Toll Restriction Dial Plan for LCR to work properly 4 Use Program 45 1 to enable the dialplan that is appropriate for the area where the LCR calls will originate 1O 1 86 January 1996 ...

Page 601: ...o No Warning Tone DK0430 General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Program 40 denies CO line access via LCR but denies all other access methods Program 47 allows CO line access via LCR but denies a other outgoing access methods 7001 7144 801 816 Line button l initialized data A LEDs OFF l Toll Restricted standard telephones should be forced to dial out...

Page 602: ...rogram 50 5 l Initialized data leaves the home area code blank kOgtYUll 50 3 LCR Special Code SELECT 31 35 Enter 31 35 to indicate the special code DATA Special Code Enter the code from the table below Special Code 31 I Examples l 411 911 611 General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initialized data leaves all codes blank l Press Button LED 07 to eras...

Page 603: ...fy the Local Route Plan by entering 01 16 Notes 1 RCTUA and B provide 8 LCR Route Plans RCTU C D provide 16 General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initialized data assigns Plan 16 to be the local call plan for RCTU C D or Plan 8 for RCTUA and B l The local plan handles special codes and operator calls Program 50 6 LCR Dial Zero Time out SELECT 6 1 I...

Page 604: ...ress Low Azigh A7 TDenotes end of string Code Code General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding fhe record sheets l initialized data leaves Tables 01 15 blank all codes 000 999 are initialized in Table 16 Several ranges or individual codes can be expressed at once by separating them with a button l 011 may be entered as an Area Code into any LCR plan to route direct dial int...

Page 605: ...ode DK0434 I High Area A Code LDenotes end of string General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initialized data leaves Tables 01 15 blank all codes 000 999 are initialized in Table 16 l Several ranges or individual codes can be expressed at once by separating them with a button l 01 I may be entered as an Area Code into any LCR plan to route direct dia...

Page 606: ... range of Area Codes press DK0435 7 Low Area High Area 1 L Denotes end of string Code Code General Notes l For more information see the instructions preceding the record sheets l Initialized data leaves Tables 01 15 blank all codes 000 999 are initialized in Table 16 l Several ranges or individual codes can be expressed at once by separating them with a button l 011 may be entered as an Area Code ...

Page 607: ... Route Plan Number q Off ice Codes Office Code Exception Table 1031 for Area Code m r Assign to LCR Route Plan Number 0 Off ice Codes Office Code Exception Table H for Area Code II Assign to LCR Route Plan Number cl Off ice Codes Note 1 To enter a range of Office Codes press DKD436 Low Office Code 1 High Office Code Denotes end of string General Notes l For more information see the instructions pr...

Page 608: ...ute Plan Number n Off ice Codes Office Code Exception Table 1071 for Area Code II Assign to LCR Route Plan Number cl Off ice Codes Office Code Exception Table q for Area Code m Assign to LCR Route Plan Number El Off ice Codes Note DK0437 1 To enter a range of Office Codes press n nII1o onn nnn Low Office Co Office T Denotes end of string General Notes l For more information see the instructions pr...

Page 609: ...LCR Route Plan Number III Off ice Codes Office Code Exception Table 1111 fzrea Code II Assign to LCR Route Plan Number u Off ice Codes Office Code Exception Table q for Area Code m Assian to LCR Route Plan Number l l Off ice Codes Note DK043 8 1 To enter a range of Office Codes press q uu uun uuuworlrl Low Office Co Office T Denotes end of string General Notes l For more information see the instru...

Page 610: ...to LCR Route Plan Number q Off ice Codes Office Code Exception Table 115 for Area Code II Assign to LCR Route Plan Number q Off ice Codes Office Code Exception Table q for Area Code ITI Assign to LCR Route Plan Number q Off ice Codes Note 1 To enter a range of Office Codes press DKD439 Low Office Code J High Office Code A L Denotes end of string General Notes For more information see the instructi...

Page 611: ...r Plan 02 Schedule 2 Route Choices For Plan 02 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 02 1 T l r 1st 2nd 3rd Last I Route Definition No s 1 S From Program 54 RCTUA and RCTUB provides 4 LCR station groups RCTiJC D provides 8 LCR station groups 2 RCTUA and RCTUB provides 4 route definition NOS RCTUC D provides 6 route definition Nos General Notes For more information see the instructions preceding the re...

Page 612: ...edule 1 Route Choices For Plan 04 abllr lr L Route Choices For Plan 04 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan JIM kEGiY 1 E n Group No 1 8 No s 1 6 2 see Program 56 From Program 54 1 RCTUA and RCTUB provides 4 LCR station groups RCTUC D provides 8 LCR station groups 2 RCTUA and RCTUB provides 4 route definition Nos RCTUWD provides 6 route definition Nos General Notes l For more information see the inst...

Page 613: ...oices For Plan 06 Schedule 2 Route Choices For Plan 06 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 06 LCR Plan d I I I Schedule 1 3 I At 2Ad 3rd Last LCR Station d Route Definition Group No 1 8 No s 1 6 see Program 56 From Program 54 7 RCTUA and RCTUB provides 4 LCR station groups RCTlJC D provides 6 LCR station groups 2 RCTUA and RCTUB provides 4 route definition Nos RCTUC D provides 6 route definition Nos...

Page 614: ...oute Choices For Plan 08 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan J LCR Plan Schedule 1 3 l l l r 1st 2nd 3rd Last LCR Station d Route Definition Group No I 8 No s 1 6 see Program 56 From Program 54 1 RCTUA and RCTUB provides 4 LCR station groups RCTUC D provides 8 LCR station groups RCTUA and RCTUB provides 4 route definition Nos RCTLJC D provides 6 route definition Nos General Notes l For more informat...

Page 615: ... Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 10 LCR Plan A I I I I Schedule 1 3 1st 2nd 3rd L t LCR Stat Route Definition Group No 1 8 No s 1 6 2 see Program 56 From Program 54 1 RCTUA and RCTLJB provides 4 LCR station groups RCTUC D provides 8 LCR station groups 2 RCTUA and RCTUB provides 4 route definition Nos RCTUC D provides 6 route definition Nos General Notes l For more information see the instruction...

Page 616: ...te Choices For Plan 14 Schedule 3 Route Choices For Plan 14 LCR Plan 7 T Schedule 1 3 LCR Station Group No 1 8 see Program 56 11st 2nd 3rd Last Route Definition No s 1 6 2 From Program 54 7 RCJLJA and RCTUB provides 4 LCR station groups RCTUUD provides 6 LCR station groups 2 RCTLJA and RCTUB provides 4 route definition Nos RCTLJC D provides 6 route definition Nos General Notes For more information...

Page 617: ......

Page 618: ...e Definition Table for LCR Plan El Route Definition Table for LCR Plan IEI Route Definition Table for LCR Plan El 1 2 5 1 1 I 1 l LkMlLLLLJ LCR Plan No 9 12 l T L Modified Digits Table 1 12 LCR Plan z ITModified Digits 1 L CO Line see Program 55 Route Definition Number1 Group 01 16 see Program 16 Note Definition Number1 Group 01 16 see Program 16 1 RCTUA and RCTUB provides 4 and RCTU C D provides ...

Page 619: ......

Page 620: ...ion Number Group No 1 8 Port LCR Station Number Group No 1 8 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 074 I I 075 I I 045 I I 114 I I 085 1 I 1 DKO451 089 1 I 060 1 I 061 1 I Note 7 To enter a range of ports press nnnmnmn Low poti7 High port General Notes l Initialized data assigns all stations to Group 1 l For more information see the instructions preceding the records sheets l Refer to Program 53 l RCTUA...

Page 621: ...roup No 1 8 Number Group No 1 8 Number Group No 1 8 Number Group No 1 8 Number Group No 1 8 123 124 125 126 127 158 189 128 159 190 129 160 191 130 161 192 131 193 132 194 133 195 134 196 135 197 1 232 I I 149 I 11 180 1 II 211 I I Note 7 To enter a range 0f ports press llrjnnrlnrj Low poi r l High port General Notes l Initialized data assigns all stations to Group 1 l For more information see the...

Page 622: ...lock Station B Options 1 Button O rarn 39 1 Program 31 LED 18 Off Privacy2 Button Off Privacy Release2 Button Off Off Off On Off On Off Off On On On Off Off I On Off I On I No Yes Off Yes Yes On Yes Yes On Yes No On Yes Yes On No No On No Yes On No No On No Yes On Notes 1 Station A attempts to override Executive or Privacy Station i3 2 Norma y either just a Privacy on Line PRIVACY or a Privacy Rel...

Page 623: ...mming 11 4 RDTU Hardware and Cabling Installation 11 g 11 51 RDTU Cable Length Switch II 8 11 52 RDTU Loop Back Jumper Plugs 11 8 11 53 RDTU Front Panel Indicators l l 8 11 5 4 RDTU Cable Installation II 9 RDTU Loop Back Testing Ii 11 11 6 1 RDTU Self Test Ii 11 11 6 2 NetworkESU Ti Span Test ll 11 11 6 3 Network CSU RDTU Span Test 11 11 DK280 RDTU Ti Performance Monitoring 11 13 Tl Fault Isolatio...

Page 624: ... and Network Loop Back Tests 11 13 RDTU Performance Monitor Printout Ii 14 RDTU Primary Secondary Reference Block Diagram 11 16 1 8 Channel RDTU Slot Configuration ll 2 1 16 Channel RDTU Slot Configuration 11 2 1 24 Channel RDTU Slot Configuration 11 2 Transmit Equalizer Setting Switch 11 8 RDTU Tl Error Record 11 15 Flowcharts 11 l Fault Classification _ 11 17 11 2 No Synchronization 11 18 11 3 S...

Page 625: ...tly pull the PCB outward If the connectors are properly mated a slight resistance will be felt Run the RDTU self check per Subsection 11 6 6 After self check passes put PI and P2 to the OFF position for normal operation and insert the RDTU PCB back into the appropriate slot 8 9 Install Channel Service Unit s CSUs and wire CSUs to the RDTU and Network Interface Unit or Customer Premises Tl circuit ...

Page 626: ...4 35 4 Expansion Unit 41 42 43 44 45 5 Expansion Unit 51 52 I 53 I I I 6 Expansion Unit 61 I 63 I 62 64 65 General Note l Program 03 code 73 software assigns 24 lines to RDTU slot in all cases CABINET 1 Base Unit 2 Expansion Unit 3 Expansion Unit 4 Expansion Unit 5 Expansion Unit Allowed RDTU Slots that must remain Slot vacant if RDTU is installed Numbers in the allowed slot 31 1 None 33 I35 61 1 ...

Page 627: ...ervice 11 3 1 RDTU to Network If the RDTU must interface to a public telephone network or common carrier Tl circuit the RDTU must be connected to a Channel Service Unit CSU Use the NDTU cable 30 ft cable supplied with RDTU to connect the RDTU to the CSU see Figure 1i l The function of the CSU is to provide the required interface between the DK280 RDTU PCB and the Public Telephone or Carrier Networ...

Page 628: ...ams listed 1 Run Program OS Assign the number of RDTU channels used and the cabinet slot number into which the RDTU will be installed see Subsections 11 2 1 and 11 2 2 If 1 8 channel are required assign code 71 if 1 16 channels are required assign code 72 or if 1 24 channels are required assign code 73 to the RDTU slot Also assign RRCS code to RCTU if RDTU tie DID channels are DTMF IMPORTANT Speci...

Page 629: ...0 If RDTU tie and or DID are dial pulse Run Program 15 1 LED ON for each DP tie DID line and run Program 30 LED 11 ON for each tie DID station port n LED04 For RDTU tie lines LED04 is normally OFF to enable dial tone to be received from the far end tie line when calling DK280 stations For DID lines LED04 is normally ON so RDTU DID lines do not send dial tone to the Central Office initialized state...

Page 630: ...upon initial installation Adjust the RDTU digital PAD as required while testing each RDTU Tl channel 11 6 January 1996 9 Program 42 Series T1 Span Timing Reference Assignments Timing references for Ti RDTU PCBs are made with the Program 42 series The RDTU Tl timing or synchronization program options determine how the DK280 system digital voice transmission path time switch is synchronized with the...

Page 631: ...s they apply to RDTU CO line applications Program 03 see previous Step 1 Specify Code 71 for an 8 channel RDTU Code 72 for a 16 channel RDTU or Code 73 for a 24 channel RDTU The 8 channel RDTU is the default Also assign RCCS to RCTU for tie and DID DTMF lines if RDTU tie and or DID lines are DTMF RRCS must be installed Program 09 Use to translate DID digits to ring designated stations Program lo l...

Page 632: ...GURE 1l 9 11 5 RDTU Hardware and Cabling Installation 11 5 1 RDTU Cable Length Switch The distance between the DK280 RDTU and CSU or RDTU to other Customer Premise Equipment CPE Tl may vary O 655 ft as shown in Figures 11 1 11 2 and 1l 3 The RDTU interface transmitter must be equalized and its impedance must be matched to the cable length connecting the RDTU to the CSU or other CPE Tl RDTU transmi...

Page 633: ...than RDTU This signal assures that the RDTU maintains synchronization when there is a problem between two Network Nodes The RDTU BALM will also light if the far end sends a Blue alarm signal during loop back The RDTU will send a Blue alarm signal when loop back test is being performed Synchronization LEDs see Figure 11 l 2 n Primary Synchronization PSYNC LED If one RDTU PCB is assigned as the Prim...

Page 634: ...ANK DK0515 L RDTU AMPHENOL 14 655 FEET MAXIMUM b General Notes l Pins 2 and 4 of the DB 15 connector in most CSUs are frame ground No connection is required l NDTU cable is supplied with RDTU PCB 30 f tmaximum l Set RDTU SW1 switch for proper loop length per Chapter 3 Cabinet Installation l Customer supplied span cables must be 22 AWG ABAM cable or if using standard 24 A WG twisted pair the transm...

Page 635: ...in the above paragraph but this test also checks RDTU SELF CHECK 1 MM8976B that the RDTU Mite1 LSI chip is functioning Guidelines for this test are described in Figure 11 9 Note Loop back tests shown in Figures 11 7 11 8 and I l 9 show loop back testing with CSlJ and Network equipment The same tests can be performed when connecting the RDTU PC9 directly to a customer premise PBX Key Hybrid Channel...

Page 636: ...l is blocked signal received from network CSU is sent back to CSU network l RDTlJ LEDs during remote loop back will continue to turn OFF ON as shown below during the test LEDS ON RDTU PCB TOP LED I CONTINUE TO CYCLE WHEN P4 IS IN ON POSITION Ti T2 T3 T4 T5 I 6 T ABOUT l 2 SECOND 0 PRIMARY SYNC ON OR OFF STEADY BOTTOM LED b 0 SECONDARY SYNC ON OR OFF STEADY DK0518 l Put P4 in the OFF position when ...

Page 637: ...d may require expensive test equipment to perform the necessary fault isolation Because of the high cost many dealers have not purchased Tl test equipment As a result on a cutover when an RDTU does not synchronize or CO lines simply do not function the site technician can only check wiring and cabling Without proper test equipment there is very little that can be tested This section provides some ...

Page 638: ...XXX TIMES DTUNO 3 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR XXXX TIMES BIPOLAR VIOLATION ERROR XXXX TIMES SLIP ERROR XXXX TIMES CRC ERROR XXXX TIMES DTUNO 4 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR XXXX TIMES BIPOLAR VIOLATION ERROR XXXX TIMES SLIP ERROR XXXX TIMES CRC ERROR XXXX TIMES DTUNO 5 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR XXXX TIMES BIPOLAR VIOLATION ERROR XXXX TIMES SLIP ERROR XXXX TIMES CRC ERROR XXXX TIMES DTUNO 6 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR XXXX TIMES BIPOLAR ...

Page 639: ... TIME b DK0521 General Notes l Latest DK280 Power ON OFF Reset Use this column to record whether the DK280 Power was reset ON or OFF and the date and time that it was reset l Use the Synchro Bit Error Bipolar Violation Error Slip Error and CRC Error columns to record the error number and the date and time that they occurred January 1996 11 15 ...

Page 640: ...itch SS The RCTU clock synchronizes the DK280 digital transmission voice path via RCTU time switch to the TELCO STRATUMl clock source l Secondary Reference Switch Over If the primary reference Tl RDTUI fails the DK280 will automatically open the RDTUI primary synchronization circuit SSt and close the RDTU2 secondary synchronization circuit SS2 At this time the DK280 digital voice path will be sync...

Page 641: ...LM on only Yes Run DK280 programs per Section 11 3 Note Remember to cycle power after Program 41 2 1No IContract your technical 1 Run DK280 programs per Section 11 3 Note MFALM only can indicate that RDTU is set for SF and the far end Tl is ESF or vice versa see Program 41 l This normally means that the far end The fault is not I classified contac your technical support group The fault is not clas...

Page 642: ... should also mm Perform RDTU self test per Section 11 6 Perform the CSU local loop back test In this test the RDTU loop back jumpers remain off and the CSU is placed in the local loop Perform the CSU network loop back test per Figure 1 l l 0 Perform RDTU Network loop back tests per Figures 11 8 and 11 9 then replace CSU NO Recheckcables then replace CSU Contact the Tl provider carrier and request ...

Page 643: ...either the RDTUs can be set as primary and secondary references slaves and the PBX as the master Program 42 data is blank or all RDTUs should be set as the master and the PBX Tl s should be slaves Program as required I If RDTU is connected to a reliable clock source Telco AT T etc then it should be programmed as a slave primary reference to the provider Program 42 data 1 If RDTU is connected to a ...

Page 644: ...11 20 January 1996 ...

Page 645: ... 6 1 Voltmeter Test 12 5 12 6 2 Ohmmeter Test 12 5 12 6 3 Cable Installation 12 5 Fault Isolation Flowcharts 12 5 Flowchart Symbols 12 l RPSU280 Power Supply Voltage Test Points Circuit Breakers Jumper Plugs 12 4 Electronic Telephone Cables Station Cable Continuity Check Using Voltmeter 12 6 Electronic Telephone Cables Station Cable Continuity Check Using Voltmeter 12 6 Digital Telephone Cables St...

Page 646: ...on 12 7 Catastrophic Faults 12 8 Station Dial Tone Faults 12 g CO Line Dial Tone Faults 12 10 DSS Console Faults 12 11 Voice Mail External Auto Attendant VM AA Faults 12 12 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Faults 12 13 Remote Maintenance Faults 12 14 ii January 1996 ...

Page 647: ...r disabled using software entries as described in the Programming Part of this manual It is very important to verify that the system programming is correct and functional before troubleshooting the hardware Initialize the system Programs 91 9 and 03 before testing new systems or when changing the RCTU PCB Faults in the DK280 are cleared by replacing PCBs telephones digital or electronic or the pow...

Page 648: ...tly per Chapter 4 Printed Circuit Boards With system power OFF install either an RCTUA B BB or D in the RCTU slot of the base cabinet If RCTUD is installed install RCTUC in the Rll slot of base cabinet If RCTUBB is installed in the RCTU slot install RCTUBA in the RI 1 slot of the base cabinet If installing RCTUC and D or RCTUBA and BB connect them together with the two ribbon cables supplied per C...

Page 649: ...ure the power supply DC output voltages at the DC OUT connector on the RPSU280 Refer to Figure 12 2 for voltage pin 7 8 locations and specifications Place the positive black meter lead on the FG screw Insert the negative red meter lead tip into the DC out connector until it makes contact Make sure that 5 volt 5 volts and 24 volts are within the range specified in Figure 12 2 Do this test with PCBs...

Page 650: ...WHITE 1 GREEN WIRE WIRE WIRE WIRE WIRE 5 v ov 5 v 5 v ov 24 VOLTS 26 3 27 8 1 26 3 27 8 24V CIRCUIT BREAKER ASSIGNMENTS I BASE CABINET 1 3RD WIRE GROUND OR POWER SUPPLY DAISY CHAIN GROUND TO NEXT POWER SUPPLY Figure 12 2 RPSU280 Power Supply Voltage Test Points Circuit Breakers Jumper Plugs BASE JUMPER PLUG EXPANSION JUMPER PLUG 12 4 January 1996 ...

Page 651: ...between the T and R of pair l green red the T and R of pair 2 black yellow and the T and R of OCA pair 3 blue white for PEKU PESU only For MDF pin numbers see Chapter 7 Wiring Diagrams 4 At the modular block measure the resistance between all wire combinations The proper readings are shown in Table 12 2 for electronic telephones and HDSSs and Table 12 4 for attendant console digital telephones DDS...

Page 652: ... of k26 3 227 8 VDC while under AC power polarity depending on voltmeter lead placements General Note The green red black yellow and white blue measurements should be within 10 percent of each other Table 12 3 Table 12 4 Digital Telephone Cables Station Cable Continuity Check Using Voltmeter Digital Telephone Attendant Console DDSS or DDCB Cables FROM TO Pair 1Wire 1Color Pair 1Wire 1Color VOLTAGE...

Page 653: ...Flowchart 12 l Fault Classification Sections 12 1 NO 0 1 A 1 A 0 technical support DK0495 January 1996 12 7 ...

Page 654: ...pplies per Section 12 5 Tag the defective unit s and return for repair I t I Check the common control PCB s per Section 12 4 1Reprogram customer database one program at a time and check YES x entering customer YES 2 H 1 Call your technical support group 1 12 8 January 1996 ...

Page 655: ...ection 12 6 Repair if necessary YES END q and retest 1 Replace the PCB 3 c NO w 3 D YES Check the cabinet Replace the defective t to the faultv stationfs onlv W R F Dower su lv oer I 1 unit and return i rTest the common control PCB per Section 12 4 I I I Retest I I NO Call your technical support group DK0497 January 1996 12 9 ...

Page 656: ...dard telephone or butt set at the TELCO block Repair as necessary 1 YES _ 27 cleared on a replaceable NO Replace the defective unit and return it to the 1 repairrter 1 Test the cabinet power SUPPLYper Section 12 5 Check the common control PCB per Section 12 4 Retest Replaceable CO Line PCBs PCOU RCOUIRCOS RGLU RDDU PEMU REMU See Chapter 1l T1 Interface for RDTU faults January 1996 ...

Page 657: ...rcuit 8 of the PDKU l For HDSS circuit 7 and 8 of PEKU PESU does not support HDSS l Check Program 28 and 29 for correct data Correct as necessary Enter correct PCB slot code using Program 08 then turn power OFF for 5 seconds and i NO Test DSS cable with cable continuity Check in Section 12 6 i NO Call your technical support group 1 DK0499 January 1996 12 11 ...

Page 658: ...g instructions in Chapter O Programming Instructions for the following programs 03 Code 92 94 for RCTU PCB 15 O and 15 3 Auto release and 31 LEDs 04 05 09 15 20 This information explains system hardware and programming options related to Voice Mail and external Auto Attendant Correct hardware and or system programming as necessary 6 A t Check that the RRCS is installed on the RCTU PCB and the prop...

Page 659: ... the correct position 300 bps or 1200 bps to match the SMDR device baud rate See Program 76 for RSlUlRSlS and also refer to PlOU PlOUS RSlU installation instructions in Chapter 5 Printed Circuit Boards Change as required NO Verify that the SMDR device communication parameters are set for E data bits no paritv l stop bit 300 or 9600 bps 1 Change as required 7 Check that the SMDR device iS wired cor...

Page 660: ...MDU modem installed on PIOU or PIOUS t 8 D i Check that PIOU PIOUS SW3 switch is in the TTY position RSSU TTY is always enabled 8 C Check that the modem PC or terminal connected to the TTY port is wired correctly per Chapter 13 Remote Maintenance or RSIU RSIS RSSU PIOU PIOUS MDF wiring in Chapter 7 Wiring Diagrams or 280AdmirV280Backup user guide Correct above if necessary or replace RSSU PIOU or ...

Page 661: ...nal Installation 13 3 13 4 3 Remote Maintenance Option Installation 13 3 13 4 4 Programming 13 4 13 4 5 IMDU and RMDS On site Testing 13 5 Local Terminal Operation 13 5 13 5 1 Requirements 13 5 13 5 2 Set up 13 5 13 5 3 Local Operation 13 6 Remote Terminal Operation 13 6 13 6 1 Requirements 13 6 13 6 2 Set up 13 6 13 6 3 Remote Operation 13 6 Selecting a Mode 13 11 Program Mode 13 11 13 8 1 System...

Page 662: ...Personal Computer 13 9 Data Dump Printout Example 13 12 Sample Printout of System Messages 13 13 Test Mode Function Diagram 13 14 PPTC Modified Wiring for External Modem to TTY Connection 13 l 0 PPTC Wiring for Local Terminal or Personal Computer to TTY Connection 13 l 0 Programming Prompts 13 l 1 Program 91 9 Complete System Initialization 13 17 Program 91 l Automatic PCB Recognition Port Renumbe...

Page 663: ...Station Messaging Add Review Change I332 Mode 94 Remote Called Station Messaging Add Review Change 13 33 Mode 96 Remote Called Station Messaging Add Change 13 34 Station CO Line Status Check 13 35 General Station Access and Button Activation 13 35 CO Line Test 13 36 System Date Day Time Setting Procedure I 3 37 Speed Dial Mode Change Review 13 38 Message Record Sheet 13 39 January 1996 III ...

Page 664: ...inal see Section 13 6 To enter Operation Modes from a Local or Remote Terminal l Program l LCD Message Entry l Data Printout l Speed Dial Entry l Test l Trace See Section 13 7 I Programming via a terminal Section 13 8 I To output data to a printer via a terminal Section 13 9 I To test via a terminal Section 13 10 To set messages via a terminal Section 13 11 To change or review speed dial via a ter...

Page 665: ...p requires a personal computer with Toshiba 280Admin or 280Backup software and an operating key connected to the LPT2 port of the PC This section of the DK280 I M manual does not provide instructions regarding the use of 280Admin or 280Backup refer to the 280Admin or the 280Backup User Guides n n n Program Download 280Admin and 28OBackup allows the database which is stored on a DK280 RCTU PCB to b...

Page 666: ...odem Option System Hardware Requirements The Strata DK280 must be equipped with a PIOU or PIOUS PCB to support the maintenance terminal external modem options Connecting the local maintenance terminal or external maintenance modem to the PIOU or PIOUS PCB is done with a standard three pair modular cord and a PPTC adapter connected to the PCB TTY jack Figures 13 2 13 3 and 13 5 13 4 2 local Mainten...

Page 667: ...he P13 jumper plug on the PIOU to the BELL configuration or cut the W4 jumper on the PIOUS also for BELL configuration 6 7 Note The P13 PIOU and W4 PIOUS CCITT configurations are not normally used in the USA The communication parameters for the terminal that will be used to communicate through the external modem connected to the TTY port should be set to seven bits even parity one stop bit Program...

Page 668: ...13 6 Conventions for Local and Remote Terminal Operation Delete the Delete key Enter the Enter or Return key Spacebar the space bar J 13 5 Local Terminal Operation 13 5 1 Requirements The KSU must have an RSIU RSIS RSSU PIOU or PIOUS PC6 installed per Chapter 4 Printed Circuit Boards Refer to Paragraph 13 4 and Figure 13 5 for terminal installation details The local terminal must have an EIA RS 23...

Page 669: ...e previous paragraph It must interface with the public telephone network and be compatible with Bell 103 or 212 modem specifications 13 6 2 Set up Refer to Figures 13 2 13 3 or 13 4 and verify that the remote terminal is connected and set up as follows 1 2 3 4 5 Connect the terminal and modem together with the RS 232 cable Note If a personal computer is being used connect the cable to the serial C...

Page 670: ...lished When communication is established the terminal will display CONNECTED or COMMUNICATIONS Note 5 To continue enter the security code pas described below Note If the connection is not completed or communication is unsuccessful the remote terminal will display NO CARRIER If this is the case check that the equipment is installed per Subsection 13 5 2 or 13 6 2 and try again Once communication is...

Page 671: ... Modem Connection Method One of Two 280Admin or 280Backup Remote Personal Computer or ASCII Terminal CO Line TTY Modular Jack 7 Bits Even Parity 1 Stop Bit PPTC Adaptor Modified for external 7 l modem connection as shown in Table 13 l Modem Line Jack lI External RS232 Modem I 3 Pair Modular Cord Standard Telephone Circuit Cable General Note l RSSU is always TTY and does not require S W3 Figure 13 ...

Page 672: ...Cable CO line connec Ring Transfer or ringing assignments General Note l Only one maintenance modem RMDS or IMDU is required on the DK280 system side to provide remote maintenance lx0486 Figure 13 4 DK280 Built in Remote Maintenance Modem RMDS or IMDU 280Admin or 280Backup Personal Computer or ASCII Terminal PPTC or PPTCS Adapter See Table 13 2 3 Pair Modular Cord General Note l RSSU is always TTY...

Page 673: ...2 3 and pins 8 20 must be reversed in the field as shown for modem connection Set Hayes modem to track status of carrier detect signal AT Cl and to answer ATSO 1 Table 13 2 PPTC Wiring for Local Terminal or Personal Computer to TTY Connection PPTC Modular to DB25 Adaptor wiring for connecting TTY jack to a local terminal or personal computer serial communications port PPTCl A 5M ADAPTOR PIOU PIOUS...

Page 674: ...tem Record Sheets which contain the customer database must be available see Chapter IO Record Sheets 13 8 2 Program Types There are three types of programs Type 1 All Type 1 programs use the same procedure however each button LED has a different meaning depending on the program number The status of the data is reviewed changed and stored in system memory using Type 1 program procedures Type 2 All ...

Page 675: ... in the Dump mode type PRG followed by the program number up to seven characters then press Enter The alphanumeric characters represent a program group or a particular program i e ALL 03 04 IO 39 etc or group range XX YY where XX or XX is the low program number and YY or YY is the high program number For a printout example see Figure 13 6 Note Programs are output only in the groups indicated To pr...

Page 676: ...lectronic telephones to make telephone calls set function buttons change the system time and date etc see Figure 13 8 IMPORTANT Any digital or electronic telephone button can be activated from the remote terminal at any time while in the Test Mode even while the end user is using the telephone Therefore caution must be used to prevent service interruption or interference The Test Mode provides sta...

Page 677: ...the message is displayed on the destination station s LCD Mode 95 To edit and or review a Calling Station Message before setting it use this mode It will display the existing message and allow additions to it such as a time or a date before it is set The message cannot be changed with this mode just added to Mode 94 To edit and or review a Called Station Message before setting it use this mode It ...

Page 678: ...e mode type m 0 q and observe MODE Note To exit the Message Mode the terminal keyboard must be in lower case 13 14 Discontinue Operation 13 14 1 Local Terminal Exit current operating mode via Section 13 7 Selecting A Mode and observe that the Mode prompt is displayed on the terminal 13 14 2 Remote Terminal Exit current operating mode per Section 13 7 Selecting A Mode and observe that the Mode prom...

Page 679: ...rams 17 20 30 30 31 31 35 40 41 41 l 43 60 8 79 91 89 13 11 Type 3 Programs Program 00 Software Check Remote Maintenance Security Code Assignments 13 12 13 16 3 Data Dump Program Program Data Dump Speed Dialing Data Dump LCD Messaging Data Dump 11 Error Status Dump Table 13 13 13 14 13 15 13 16 13 16 4 Remote LCD Message Program Mode 97 Remote Calling Station Messaging Add Change Mode 95 Remote Ca...

Page 680: ... Y 04 N 05 N Y 06 N 07 N Y 9 Press Spacebar two times and change LED 09 to ON by P 91 typing Y P91 1 01 N Y 02 N 03 N Y 04 N 05 N Y 06 N 07 N Y 08 N 09 N Y 10 PreSSEnter Initialization complete Repeat all steps a second time Note If program data is not entered correctly Enter will not respond To retry press Delete Space at the same time CAUTION Running this program will erase all system data and d...

Page 681: ...tered correct y press Delete Enter 02N Y at the same time to return to Step 3 8 Press ENTER twice DK CONNECT You will exit the programming mode after you press Enter the CODE second time CAUTION Running this program will drop all calls including the remote maintenance CO line The remote maintenance communication path between the remote terminal modem and the DK280 remote maintenance modem must be ...

Page 682: ... 00 02 01 N Y 02 N Y 8 PreSSEnter P90 00 02 01 N Y Initialization complete Note P90 02 N Y If program data is not entered correctly then Enter will not respond To retry press Delete Enter 9 Exit Program 90 P90 Type and then press Enter P IO Enter Program 77 P77 Type 7 7 and then press Enter 11 Type I I 4 P77 1 14 N Type Y and then press Enter P77 1 14 N Y P77 12 To Exit this Program Type and then ...

Page 683: ...tton LED number 0 1 P92 P92 1 01 N 5 Change LED 01 to ON by typing Y P92 P92 1 01 N Y 6 Press Spacebar two times P92 P92 1 01 N Y 02 N 03 N 7 Change LED 03 to ON by typing Y P92 P92 1 01 N Y 02 N 03 N Y 8 Press Enter P92 Initialization complete P92 1 01 N Y 02 N Note If program data is not entered correctly Enter will 03 N Y P92 not respond To retry press Delete Enter at the same time 9 Clear syst...

Page 684: ... 0 1 P92 P92 2 01 N 5 Change LED 01 to ON by typing Y P92 P92 2 01 N Y 6 Press Spacebar three times P92 P92 2 01 N Y 02 N 03 N 04 N 7 Change LED 04 to ON by typing Y P92 P92 2 01 N Y 02 N 03 N 04 N Y 8 PreSsEnter P92 Initialization complete P92 2 01 N Y 02 N Note If program data is not entered correctly Enter Will not respond To retry press Delete Enter at the same time 03 N 04 N Y P92 9 Clear LCD...

Page 685: ...ype button LED number 0 2 P92 P92 3 02 N 5 Change LED 02 to ON by typing Y P92 P92 3 02 N Y 6 PreSSSpacebar P92 P92 3 02 N Y 03 N 7 Change LED 03 to ON by typing Y P92 P92 3 02 N Y 03 N Y 8 f eSSEnter P92 Initialization complete P92 3 02 N Y 03 N Y Note P92 If program data is not entered correctly Enter wi not respond To retry press Delete Enter at the same time 9 Clear the timed reminders using t...

Page 686: ...LED number 0 2 P92 P92 4 02 N 5 Change LED 02 to ON by P92 typing Y P92 4 02 N Y 6 PreSSSpacebar twotimes P92 P92 4 02 N Y 03 N 04 N 7 Change LED 04 to ON by P92 typing y P92 4 02 N Y 03 N 04 N Y 8 Press Enter P92 Initialization complete P92 4 02 N Y Note 03 N If program data is not entered correctly Enter will 04 N Y P92 not respond To retry press Delete Enter at the same time 9 To exit this prog...

Page 687: ...ype 0 1 change button LED 01 to ON by typing Y P92 5 01 N Y 5 Press Spacebar fOUt times P92 5 01 N Y 02 N 03 N 04 N 05 N 6 Change LED 05 to ON by typing Y P92 5 01 N Y 02 N Note 03 N if program data is not entered correct y Enter will not 04 N respond To retry press Delete Enter at the same time 05 NY 7 hi SSEnter P92 5 01 N Y Initialization complete 02 N 03 N 04 N 05 N P92 6 To exit this program ...

Page 688: ...4 to ON by P92 typing Y P92 9 03 N Y 04 N Y 8 PreSSEnter P92 Initialization complete P92 9 03 N Y Note 04 N Y If program data is not entered correctly Enter will P92 not respond To retry press Delete Enter 9 To exit this program type and press Enter u q IMPORTANT This program clears Call Forward memory for all stations but does not reset the Call Forward indication on the station Call Fonvard LCD ...

Page 689: ...ange Button LED Status PlO 1 01 N Y Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the button LED status if required Y or N Example Type Y 3 To Advance to Next Button LED PlO 1 01 Y Press Spacebar Repeat Step 5 if necessary 02 N 7 To Store Data of Button LED Status Change PI0 1 01 Y Buttton LED ON PreSSEnter IL Button LED Number Repeat Steps 3 and 4 Program Code Note This step is optional and not req...

Page 690: ... 0 1 6 To Change Button LED Status P30 004 01 N Y Refer to the System Record Sheet and change the Button LED status if required Y or N Example Type Y 7 To Advance to Next Button LED Press Spacebar repeat Step 6 if necessary 8 To Store Data of Button LED Status Change PreSSEnter Repeat Steps 3 8 to review or change data pT T c k tE F 9 To Exit Program Store Data PlO A To exit this program press the...

Page 691: ...ode PO0 1 0000 Enter Action Code 1 The system will display the present PO0 level 1 four digit code Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required Press Enter 5 To Change Level 2 Security Code PO0 2 0000 Enter Action Code 2 The system will display the present PO0 level 2 four digit code Refer to the System Record Sheet and change if required Press Enter 6 To Exit This Program PO0 Type and ...

Page 692: ...e DUMP press Enter To Output Speed Dialing Data TypeREp orjo press Enter nnn ALL or SYS or port number for individual station To Stop Printout at Any Time PreSSDelete Enter To Exit the Dump Mode Type QUIT then press Enter Table 13 I 8 LCD Messaging Data Dump SteD I Action 2 3 Enter the Data Dump Mode Atthe MODE prompt typeDUMP press Enter To Output Message Data Type MSG nnn press Enter nnn or ALL ...

Page 693: ...C ERROR DTU NO 5 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION ERROR SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR DTU NO 6 SYNCHRO BIT ERROR BIPOLAR VIOLATION ERROR SLIP ERROR CRC ERROR Tl ERROR DISPLAY XXXX TIMES 1 TIME 1024 ERRORS XXXX TIMES 1 TIME 256 X 256 ERRORS XXXX TIMES 1 TIME 256 ERRORS XXXX TIMES 1 TIME 256 ERRORS XXXX TIMES XXXX 0 9999 XXXX TIMES XXXX TIMES XXXX TIMES XXXX TIMES XXXX TIMES XXXX TIMES XXXX TIMES XXXX TIM...

Page 694: ...10 19 personal messages and 60 99 system messages General Note l To store system message change permanently DKT EKT XXX must be station assigned to Port 000 m97 XXX p 00 To Add a Message m97 xxx Pal MI Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and type message alphanumeric 32 characters max New message displays as it is typed To Set the Message on the DKT EKT LCD Set the terminal keyboard to lower c...

Page 695: ...al messages and 60 99 system message General Notes l To store system messages permanently DKT or EKT XXX must be the station at port 000 o Afterp 00 is entered the previously stored message is displayed If there is no stored message nothing is displayed 5 To Change Previous Message m95 xxx 00 M l Set the terminal keyboard to upper case and change message alphanumeric 32 characters max 6 To Set the...

Page 696: ... message memory location 10 19 personal messages and 60 99 system messages After p c n is typed the previously stored message M is displayed If there is no stored message nothing is displayed m94 xxx P Yyy 00 tM1 To Change the Message M Set the terminal keyboard to uppercase and change message as required alphanumeric 32 characters max for total message m94 xxx p WY prJ J M To Set Message Set the ...

Page 697: ...mmand and YYY originating m96 XXX p YYY station number 5 Type p nn p page command and m96 XXX p YYY pun 00 2 digit message memory location IO 19 personal messages and 60 99 system messages 6 To Add the New Message M m96 XXX P YYY P OCMI Set the terminal keyboard to uppercase and type message as required alphanumeric 32 characters max New message displays as it is typed 7 To Set the Message m96 xxx...

Page 698: ...Step 1 Action Enter the Test Mode At the MODE prompt type TEST press Enter To Activate A Button Type TKXXXKYY press Enter XXX Port number and YY button number Note Button numbers begin at 01 To Activate A Function Button Type TKXXF press Return F function button designator SPKR S HOLD H CONF C F S H C M MIC M To Access A CO Line via CO Access Code and Dial Out Type TKXXKO AAA press Enter AAA 1 2 o...

Page 699: ...to release the T TKXXX S call Type TKXXXS press Enter T 5 Continue returning to Step 2 until all CO lines are tested 6 To Set Up A CO to CO Connection TTKXXC Press the Cnf Trn CONF TRNS button on TRXXX T Type TKXXXC press Enter General Notes l Station B is connected via Step 3 l VeriQ that Program 15 5 allows CO to CO connections l The next step must be completed immediately to avoid dial tone tim...

Page 700: ...3 To Set Time Of Day T TKOOO KOl 652HHMMSS A Type TIC000 KO1 652HHMMSS press Enter T TKOOO KXX B Type TKOOO KXX press Enter 4 To Set Day of Week T TKOOO KOl 653D A Type TKOOO K01 653D press Enter T TKOOO KXX D day of week with Sunday 1 Saturday 7 B Type 000 xxlt press Enter 5 To Exit the Test Mode At T prompt type QUIT press Enter Legend KOl Directory Number DN or Intercom Button KXX The button th...

Page 701: ...Press SPACE to review each memory location or go to Step 4 4 1 To enter speed dial number 20 digits max R N Press r 20 digit number 00 00 on _ 00 OR New speed dial number 2 To link two speed dial numbers Press A r 17 digit number 0 7 0 0 0 T System speed dial location 690 699 Refer to the Digital or Electronic Telephone User Guide for information regarding chain dialing Special Entries F Flash P l...

Page 702: ...Table 13 29 Message Record Sheet Copy several sheets if necessary MESG MESG MESG MESG MESG MESG MESG MESG MESG MESG MESG MESG DKC482 January 1996 13 39 ...

Page 703: ...13 40 January 1996 ...

Page 704: ......

Page 705: ...phone User Guide U 83 Liquid Crystal Display Electronic Telephone User Guide u 133 Standard Telephone User Guide U l 59 System Administrator Guide U l 76 PC Data Interface User Guide U l 95 Add on Module DSS Console User Guide U 215 Quick Reference Guides DKT 2000 Series Telephone Quick Reference Guide U 225 EKT Series Electronic Telephone Quick Reference Guide u 229 January 1996 i ...

Page 706: ......

Page 707: ...ide ix Supporting Documentation ix Chapter 1 The Grand Tour Equipment 1 Button Defrltrons 3 LED Indications 8 On hook Off hook 9 Volume Controls 10 Ring Tone and incoming Handsfree Answerback Volume 10 Handset Receiver Volume 10 Speaker and Off hook Call Announce Volume 10 Background Music BGM 11 Background Music BGM Over Telephone Speakers 11 Background Music Volume ll ...

Page 708: ...ard Busy No Answer 29 Call Forward Cancel 30 Call Forwarding a Phantom Directory Number 30 Call Foward External 31 Remote Call Forward External Destination Change 32 Call Forward Fixed 32 ii Chapter 2 Basic Features Icontinued Automatic Callback 33 CO Line Queuing with Automatic Callback 34 Handsfree Answerback 35 Handsfree Monitoring 35 Account Code Calls 36 Forced Account Codes 36 Emergency Over...

Page 709: ...tion 70 Using a DN Button 70 Using CO Buttons 71 SupeNlslon 72 Timed Reminders 72 Toll Restnctoon Override 73 Tone Pulse Dialing 74 Chapter 4 Toshiba Voice Mail Integration Using Toshiba Voice Mail Systems 75 Setting Call Forward 75 Voice Mail Identification Code 75 Call Forward To Toshiba Voice Systems 77 Message Retrieval 76 Chapter 5 Centrex Application Flexible Intercom Numbering 79 Centrex Fe...

Page 710: ...functions of feature buttons and their associated Light Emitting Diodes LEDs Chapter 2 Basic Features contains descriptions and operating procedures for commonly used features It provides detailed descriptions of the features contained in the Sfrafa DK280 Electronic Telephone Quick Reference guide Chapter 3 Advanced Features provides detailed operating instructions for the more sophisticated telep...

Page 711: ...r more information on Multiple Directory Numbers DNs PDNs and PhDNs Extra bold letters represent telephone buttons Your telephone may not have all of the buttons mentioned in this guide See your Telephone System Administrator for more information on buttons and access codes means through is used for multiple key entries Example Press Speed Dial XX Redkd Spkr Xx 06 60 seconds l denotes the step in ...

Page 712: ...ed on your telephone Understanding the function of the feature buttons and their associated LEDs will improve your efficiency in using the telephone and will help you to take advantage of all of the benefits your telephone offers Equipment This guide applies to all electronic telephones EKTs except the 10X and 20X series connected to a Strata DK280 system with Release 3 software Electronic telepho...

Page 713: ...e group ABR Automatic Busy Radial Button Press to set up Automatic Busy Redial after receiving a busy tone on a dialed CO line call not available on tie or DID CO lines ACR Automatic Callback Button Press to recall a busy station or station in the DND as soon as that station becomes idle or deactivates DND Also used for CO line queuing BGM Background Music Button Press to turn Background Music on ...

Page 714: ...LCAD Unanswered Lost Call Automatic Dial Button Press to automaticallv dial the stored ANI Automatic Number Identification or Caller ID number shdwn on the LCD Un wered calls will be stored on tGs button and on the LCD MIC Microphone Button Fixed Press to turn the microphone off on while telephone is in use MC0 Microphone Cutoff Button MWffL MSC W NT NT 1 4 NT L 1 4 CPD Press to turn the microphon...

Page 715: ... CO line from a group of lines appearing under one button Privacy Button Press to block Privacy Override on common CO line buttons This button does not block Busy Override or Executive Override Privacy Release Button Press to release privacy on common CO line buttons enabling other station users to enter your conversations on those buttons Privacy release does not apply to common DN buttons which ...

Page 716: ...econd Other stations CO or DN LEDs that show your station steady red Hold Recall Exclusive Hold Recall When a held call is recalling your Idle station Your station s CO or DN LED flashes two pulses in the first second then ten pulses in the next second Hold Recall other stations CO or DN LEDs that show your station flash red Exclusive Hold Recall other stations with the same line number steady red...

Page 717: ...andset is placed on hook the handset receiver volume level will refurn fo fhe original level for the next call This original eve can be adjusted to hfgherNow r in system programming Speaker and Off hook Call Announce Volume The steps to adjust the speaker volume level apply to calls originated on hook from your station internal and CO dial tone as well as Off hook Call Announce OCA After you press...

Page 718: ...ion This means that whenever you lift the handset or press the SPKR button you will receive dial tone without having to first press a DN or CO line button n If you hear silence after you lift the handset your telephone does not have Automatic Off Hook Selection You will need to press any available DN or CO button before dialing an internal or external number Ringing Line Preference n If your telep...

Page 719: ...Access Codes Dial tone stops after the first digit is dialed but the LED will continue to flash at the In use rate To Dial an Outside Call While On hook Press any available CO or PL button or press DN CO or press a DN and enter a CO line group access code Dial a telephone number Lift the handset when the called party a SWC rS Hang up or press SPKR when the call is To Dial an Internal Call 1 Lift t...

Page 720: ...dset You will hear internal dial tone when you press the button and the LED will flash at the In use rate See previous Notes under Dialing Internal Calls The LED will continue to flash Calling from a speakerphone to a telephone in the Handsfree Answerback mode is not recommended because the characteristics of the two are not matched Press SPKR to disconnect the call if you did not lift the handset...

Page 721: ...nect to a transferred line before it is answered press CO press DN 4 2 Call Transfer with Camp on You can transfer calls lo idle or busy stations Note You cannot fransfer or camp on to stations that are in the Do Not Disturb DND mode After you press CONFITRNS the Line or DN LED will flash at the conference rate and the LED will flash at the In use rate You will hear internal dial tone The Director...

Page 722: ...You will hear a one second warning tone You can choose Step A or B below You can place the call on hold 1 Press HOLD 2 Press the flashing DN or CO or if your telephone has the Auto Hold feature just press the flashing DN 01 co or You can end the currenl call and answer the next by Pressing the ringing DN or CO or Hanging up the current call the camped on call will ring your station Then press DN o...

Page 723: ...e or no answer return to the original connection by pressing the original DN or CO or hang up and the original connection will recall you immediately 22 To Add a Station to a CO Line Call 1 While on a CO line call press CONF TRNS 2 Dial the Directory Number of the station to be added 3 Press CONF TRNS after the party answers To add another party repeat steps 1 3 To Hold a Call that Appears on a CO...

Page 724: ...utomatically recall to your station if your station is busy the parked call will camp on to your station The CO or DN LED will flash at the consultation hold rate until you enter the orbit number 24 2 Enter a General Orbit Number f9 0 0 919 or enter a valid PDN 3 Hang up To Pick Up or Retrieve a Parked Call 1 Press the parked CO 01 DN button or press PARK press CONFlTRN5 332 2 Enter the Orbit Numb...

Page 725: ...9z pesn sm apo3 ssa33 2 ue 11 u dfj ssald JO aa ssajd 8 pmwo M sp3 lp LJMo laqlu N KmoaJ a aql law3 z Z 0 9 I INCiVd JO Nad E ssadd moA J M peaoold pue k JO iae saedd E 03 JO ...

Page 726: ...ed and calls will forward to the stored station number To Cancel Call Forward No Answer N Repeat Step 1 and hang up 28 To Set Call Forward Busy No Answer 1 2 3 4 5 Press CFWNA or press a PDN or PhDN to be forwarded 604 Enter the Directory Number to which calls will forward Press SDS Enter the time at which the call will forward 08 60 seconds Press CFBINA 01 press RDL then press SPKR Call Forward B...

Page 727: ...to have a dedicated Message Waiting button LED Each PhDN can be set to any mode of Call Forward independent of other DNs on the telephone Calls to your PhDNs will be forwarded to the destination DN according to the call forwarding mode you have chosen Phones equipped with an LCD display will see a message indicating call forward the call forward type the PhDN that the call is being forwarded from ...

Page 728: ...l hear a confirmation tone Call Forward Fixed If you activate this feature all internal and Private or Direct Inward Dialed CO line calls to your station will forward immediately to a Primary Directory Number set in system programming Your station must be assigned with the CFF button in system programming to activate this feature The CFF LED will light steady red and all calls will forward to a st...

Page 729: ...gle long tone followed by the caller s voice 2 Do not lift the handset speak toward the telephone in a normal voice level To Use Handefree Monitoring 1 While off hook on a call press and hold down SPKR 2 Place the handset on hook 3 Release SPKR 4 Lift the handset when the distant party returns Handsfree Answerback You can answer internal calls without lifting the handset The LED will flash at the ...

Page 730: ...ss SDS 5 0 or CONFllRNS 4 6 2 Enter the Account Code Voluntary Account Codes Voluntary Account Codes are optiohal and can be entered after accessing a CO line or during a call that you originated or received Your conversation will not be interrupted Press if your telephone does not have an SDS button Some telephones require that you enter the account code before dialing a telephone number If a val...

Page 731: ...Advanced Features Speed Dial Pause and Flash Storage 5 Press RDL or To Store a System Speed Dial Number at Station ZOO 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press RDL or 3 Press SDS or i 4 Enter the Speed Dial code that you want to store the telephone number in 5 Enter the telephone number 6 Press RDL or To Clear a Speed Dial Entry l Repeat the preceding procedure skipping step 4 3 To store DN button access...

Page 732: ...u at regular intervals ABR is an optional feature enabled in system programming This feature may not be allowed on some or all lines in your system depending on the telephone line type connected To Activate Automatic Busy ABR Redial While listening to busy tone 1 Press ABR O press CDNFITRNS 4 4 2 Hang up or press SPKR 3 The system will redial the number 4 Your telephone will receive ring tone when...

Page 733: ...ther Group 1 Press a DN 2 Enter 5 then the access code 320 339 of the group that the station belongs to After you press a particular button you will be connected to a new incoming CO line call for that particular Tenant Group PKUPl 4 buttons correspond to tenant groups 1 4 You will be connected to a new incoming ringing call in any Tenant Group after dialing the access code Notes 1 In non tenant s...

Page 734: ...ll telephones have a standard fixed MW FL button LED for receiving retrieving messages left by callers that called the telephone s Primary Directory Number PDN Phantom Directory Numbers Telephones that own PhDNs can also have up to four additional flexible message waiting PhDNlMWs for receiving retrieving messages left by callers that called the respective PhDNs Up to four Message Waiting indicati...

Page 735: ... for a detailed explanation of this feature The phone can also be programmed to have up to four additional Message Waiting buttons This allows you to have a separate Message Waiting button for up to four Phantom Directory Numbers programmed into your phone See Appendix B Multiple Directory Numbers for more information To Set a Message Waiting Indication for a PhDNIMW Follow the same procedure used...

Page 736: ...d at the designated station Notes 1 You can have as many as four ALERT buttons to send receive the Alert Signal to from up to four other telephones 2 The ALERT button s must be assigned to telephones that will be linked as partners 3 The destination of the ALERT button also must be programmed as Speed Dial numbers as follows Alert Signal l destination PDN stored in Speed Dial i 4 8 Alert Signal 2 ...

Page 737: ... new call will flash at the in use rate and the new line will be accessed The LED of the Line or DN just automatically placed on hold will flash at the on hold rate and the LED of the line just accessed will flash at the In use rate Direct Inward System Access DISA Outside callers with telephones that send Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF tones can call in on CO lines programmed for DISA and dial Di...

Page 738: ...rimary Directory Number by pressing a Direct Station Selection DSS button The LED of the button shows the status idle busy of the station If connected to a CO line pressing this button will put the outside party on hold Transfer the call as you would normally by voice announcing or camping on by hanging up or by pressing the RLS ANS button The station could be busy on its Primary DN Secondary DN a...

Page 739: ...ction of the door phone To Output and DTMF Tones l While on an outside call press then press To Activate Group Listening This feature enables you to set your telephone so that you and people near your telephone can hear the distant party over the speaker but the distant party will not be able to hear you 1 Establish an off hook call with a distant party 2 Hold down SPKR The SPKR LED will light red...

Page 740: ...g calls while on hook The microphone and accompanying LED are always on when receiving internal DN calls to allow Handsfree Answerback and may be on or off when placing an on hook CO line or internal DN call 1 Each station s microphone may be set in system programming to be either on or off at the start of handsfree dialing n Each station s MIC button may be set in system programming to switch on ...

Page 741: ...e Signaling 1 Lift the handset and call the desired station 2 If you receive busy or ring tone press 2 1 To Answer an SP OCA Talk Back Call l Speak toward the microphone of your phone to talk back to the SP OCA caller To Force a Disconnect You can disconnect en SP OCA call made to your station N Press SPKR The SP OCA call will be disconnected after you press the button To Change the Volume while I...

Page 742: ...e enabled in system programming to send a Do Not Disturb Override signal Also a telephone can be enabled in system programming to block Do Not Disturb Override from all other telephones Note Privacy Override is blocked by DND OCA however is possible to DND stations from stations that are allowed DND override To Initiate Executive Override l After reaching a busy station press 3 To Make All CO Line...

Page 743: ...o calls on common CO buttons calls on common multi appearing DN button calls are always private and cannot be accessed by more than one telephone even if other telephones share a common DN 62 To Activate Privacy Release l While on a CO line call press PRV RLS To Deactivate Privacy Release N Press PRV RLS again To Release a Call and Answer Another If you are on a call and a new CO or DN call is rin...

Page 744: ...t a normal voice level toward the telephone 4 Press SPKR to disconnect the call To Dial an tnternal Call On hook Dialing with Voice First Signaling 1 Leave the handset on hook and press a WI 2 Dial the desired station Directory Number The Line LED will flash at the incoming call rate After you press the button the Line or DN LED will flash at the in use rate and you will be connected to the call I...

Page 745: ...m e eaq M noA 6u euB s IS aye JO as spuooas mo hana pumas auo auo 6 e eaq M noh 6u eu6 5 a 01 uaddeq II MGU MO OJ aq poy au 6u eufi s ua sk au uo Gu puadaa WJ3 Sk SN aO OA 0 a EOS M M Nad alp aq 6up pue ap uaAo knq o L ssald snw pue am Asnq a r aaau e wlle sAs alp S W Nad lWO B SW C Nad B 0 klX S MS euoqdala e UaL M x ssq Ileo Aq Ileo e 0 pa ahw e S 1 133 ay ueqrv ed aql o yeads E SS d Z lX U N ho...

Page 746: ...line acce ss code and the long distance carrier code 1910288 in the System Speed Dial location 690 from Station 200 Press RDL and SDS 6 9 0 PDN 9 10 2 8 8 RDL The CO line access code is 9 The long distance carrier access code 10 2 8 8 PDN is used to automatically access internal dial tone before dialing 9 10 2 8 8 To Call with a Speed Dial Button 1 Access a CO line 2 Press SD To Call with a Speed ...

Page 747: ...ill flash at the in use rate and all parties will be conferenced If you receive a busy tone or no answer return to the original connection by pressing DN You will hear dial tone and the DN LED will flash at the exclusive hold rate after you press CONF TRNS After you hang up the DN LED will continue to flash at the exclusive hold rate and the MO lines will be connected The LED will turn off when th...

Page 748: ...nder tone sounds The time will be recorded in memory and you should hear a beeping tone for 30 seconds or until cancelled by going off hook when the hour and minute occur 72 To Cancel a Timed Reminder 1 Press a DN then dial 605 609 2 Press RDL To Override Change Toll Restriction 1 Access an outgoing line using a CO line or PNI 2 Press CONFITRNS and enter 4 7 3 Enter the Toll Restriction Override C...

Page 749: ... send DTMF tones Note When originating or receiving a new CO line call the system wi automatically place the line in the dial pulse mode 74 Using Toshiba Voice Mail Systems This chapter explains how to program your telephone for Call Forward and message retrieval when using a Toshiba Voice Mail System with your Strata DK280 system Refer to the appropriate Toshiba Voice Mail User Guide for more inf...

Page 750: ...N or PhDN then enter a Call Forward access code shown on right 2 Dial the Voice Mail System Directory number 3 PressCF or press SDS RDL SPKR To Cancel Call Forward to the Toshiba VP System I Press the appropriate Call Forward button or press a PDN or PhDN 6 0 I then hang up Call Forward To Toshiba Voice Systems By setting Call Forward to the Toshiba Voice Mail System on your telephone information ...

Page 751: ...entrex Application 5 r _ Z il xdi 0 i il f A 3 I I_ Your system may be equipped with the Centrex Application which enhances its feature capability when installed behind a Centrex or PBX system Your telephone may have access to one or more of the enhanced Centrex features listed below Flexible Directory Numbering A station s PDN can be three or four digits It is therefore possible to match a statio...

Page 752: ... Line Access Codes 80 With scmw systems you may only have to dial one of the codes 9 General group code or Least Cost Routing LCR 8 0 1 8 1 6 Line Group code 7001 f47144 COlineaccesscode2 Use447001 4 4 7 14 4 if your telephone does not have an SDS button or when storina on an SD or as a Speed Dial code since indicates the end of a Speed Dial entry Notes 1 If you press 9 in a system programmed with...

Page 753: ...r Station Speed Dial Location 1 2 3 4 5 Do not lift the handset Press RDL then press SD Dial a Speed Dial access code Enter a feature access code or sequence of codes press RDL If you lifted the handset in Step 1 the system would automatically dial the number that you most recently dialed You can program the CONFfI RNS PDN and HOLD functions within the Speed Dial sequence You can only enter 20 dig...

Page 754: ... 3 1 5 Paging Station Group F HOLD PDN 3 1 6 Paging S ion Group G HOLD PDN 3 1 7 Paging Station Group H HOLD PDN 3 1 8 84 Table 4 continued Feature Access Codes FEAWRES FEA REACCESSC00ESE0 Paging External Page Zone A HOLD PDN It 3 5 Paging External Page Zone B HOLD PDN 3 6 Paging3 External Page Zone C HOLD PDN 3 7 Paging External Page Zone D HOLD PDN 3 8 Pagings All Call External Page Zone HOLD PD...

Page 755: ... an entire department For instance when the PhDN appears on a group of telephones such as the Sales Department it will ring on all of the telephones of the group when it is called You can set Call Forward and Voice Mail ID code for PhDNs that are owned by your telephone Notes 7 Incoming cak wit come in to your telephone s PDNs from the top down For example incoming calls to Station 200 s PDNs will...

Page 756: ...on 200 I 1501 Station 200 ova PhDN 500 Station 201 owns PhDN 501 Secondary Directory Numbers for Station 201 t Calls to Station 201 can be answered by Station 200 yp ing the flashing r Figure 3 Multiple Directory Numbers Example STATION 200 ...

Page 757: ...ction Overview 5 Condition Creating Display 5 Chapter 2 Feature Operation Dater7imelDay Adjustment 19 Call Forward Display 20 Call Forward All Calls 20 Call Forward Busy 20 Call Forward No Answer 21 Call Forward Busy No Answer 21 Call Forward Fixed 21 Call Forward External 21 Call Forwarding a Primary and or Phantom Directory Number 22 Call Park Park and Page i 23 Parked Call Retrieval 24 Park Orb...

Page 758: ...ion Messaging 42 Remote Calling Station Messaging 43 Busy Station Messaging 43 Return a Busy Station Message 44 This user guide shows you how to operate the Strata DK 6500 series Electronic Liquid Crystal Display LCD ZO button Speakerphone with LCD 6520 SD IMPORTANT This guide only covers the LCD functions of the electronic telephone Use it with the Strata DK Electronic Telephone User Guide Organi...

Page 759: ...buttons and access codes means through is used for multiple key entries Example Press Speed Dial XX Redial Spkr XX 0840 seconds l denotes the step in a one step procedure Notes Elaborate specific items or reference other information Chapter Titles First Level Headings Action Text Specific instructions on how to perform a procedure are numbered and entered in the left hand column IMPORTANT I Calls ...

Page 760: ...he LCD telephones provide you with Alphanumeric Messaging Busy Lamp Field BLF Identification Central Office CO Line Identification Timed Reminders with Messaging Speed Dial Memo Directory Dialing Intercom User Name Number Display Call Duration Display and Date Time of Day Display Mode Page and Scroll functions of the LCD are summarized in addition to the hardware and button options of the phone it...

Page 761: ...information displays and feature prompting makes your call handling more efficient Alphanumeric messaging capability is also provided All display functions occur automatically as call processing proceeds I PI SCRLO Figure 3 SCRL PAGE and MODE Buttons The uses of the three buttons shown above are SCRL n Scrolls through Message Waiting station numbers n Scrolls through the speed dial digits if more ...

Page 762: ...splay View Call Park Orbit list Soft Keys ON Soft Keys OFF Remote called station messaging Remote calling station messaging Although you can turn Soft Keys on Soft Keys are not recommended for Electronic Telephones 4 Account Codes GICE O O nJ _ I I XJ I_ COOl iYYzzq LCD Function Overview IMPORTANT I AN Liquid Crystal Display LCD examples in this user guide are shown with soft keys turned OFF Note ...

Page 763: ...Station 201 is transferring a ANI or Caller ID call to you station 200 For the purpose of demonstration following screens depict different displays of your station 6 Caller ID Example Auto Busy Redial ABR R j Automatic Callback ACE In After the transferring station station 201 hangs up When you an swer the transferred call If you do not answer the transferred call within a programmed period of tim...

Page 764: ...stations will be displayed The station groups will increment each time PAGE is pressed thereby eventually displaying all stations 8 Call Forward for DNsl Call Forward for I Call Forward for PhDNsI In the Call Fonvard examples LLL the calling DN PPP TTT VVV the Call Fonvard From Directory Number RRR SSS UUU the Call Forward Destination Directory Number This LCD display appears when you begin to set...

Page 765: ...splay an identifying name of up to 16 characters The name will be displayed on outgoing and incoming calls 10 CO Line Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Incoming Call YYZtZj When Call Is Answered I Hold I I _ Hold Recall _i Outgoing 1 J CO Line Queuing Callback Incoming CO call the system station line number displays if your station is programmed for incoming ringing on that CO line as long as no CO identificatio...

Page 766: ......

Page 767: ...oice Mail I Off hook Call Announce j j 151 Overrides 1 Busy Override When you set Message Waiting at another station the number of that station is displayed When you hang up after setting Message Waiting at another station a remmder is shown on the top row of your display A indicates there are more messages in memory Press SCRL to rotate through more messages The display shows the numbers of up to...

Page 768: ...s displayed Tandem I D r _ Conference 1 _ When a station presses a busy CO button to enter an existing conversation the station that initiates the override displays the CO line identification on the LCD The overridden station s LCD displays the initiating station s number The display remains until the end of the call Privacy override does not apply to DN buttons Recalling Station When a transferre...

Page 769: ... User Guide for instructions about features that apply to both on LCD and LCD telephones Date Time Day Adjustment This operation is possible from port 00 usually station 200 or attendant consoles and enables you to set the date time and day Dial year month day in the format YYMMDD Enter a leading 0 for any single digit month or day You will hear a confirmation tone Dial hour minute second in the 2...

Page 770: ...th this feature all calls to your station will fonvard to a selected station if you do not answer within a time that you designate Call Forward Busy No Answer With this feature all calls to your station will forward immediately to a selected station whenever you are busy on another call or in the Do Not Disturb mode Calls will also forward if you do not answer the call within a time that you desig...

Page 771: ...he Phantom Directory Number that the call is being forwarded from and the destination number to which the call is forwarded To Cancel a Call Forward Press the PDN or PhDN you want to cancel Call Forwarding 0 Dial 6 0 1 Press SPKR To Park and Park Page Automatic Orbit Selection While connected to a calling party press PARK or CPIPG Enter 9 9 9 and the system will park the call on an Orbit 9 0 0 9 1...

Page 772: ...n the paging announcement The CO line LED or PDN LED will flash at the In use rate when the call is picked up or retrieved To Display Parked Calls 1 Press MODE IMOE NO 2 Press 6 6 LN NN ORBIT XXX 1 I 3 Press SCRL to monitor the next parked call 4 Press SCRL to monitor the next parked call Park Orbit list Display This feature enables you to monitor view the calls that are parked at your station If ...

Page 773: ...l turn off The DNs after SENT are the DNs which received your message waiting indication signal if you sst a message waiting indication signal 26 To answer the Msg LED indication from ths called station press the flashing MWlFL button To clear the Msg LED that you set on some other telephone s DN from the DN that sent the Message Waiting signal press the DN button dial the Directory Number that yo...

Page 774: ... mail unit to play back your messages Press the DN for which you want to retrieve messages The LCD displays 6 5 7 ID CODE SET The LCD displays the data as it is entered These digits include special voice mail codes and the DN mailbox number For example for Toshiba Systems dial 92NNN where NNN is the DN mailbox number You will hear a confirmation tone the LCD displays DATA PROGRAMMED Retrieve Voice...

Page 775: ...eleohone users The LCD can also disDlav the names numbers of the person calling iour telephone or the name of the b son you are calling Names and memos can also be set to display with speed dial numbers and timed reminders Storing a Message in Memory The LCD M LED flashes Personal message IO 19 system message 60 99 port 00 only The current message if any will be displayed The LCD M LED lights stea...

Page 776: ...vmVa E9 llV3 19 3Nl133Wb NI l9 H3NlllOllllO 09 paz e lI S am w 03 y rv 6u 6esSayy o mmueqdlV atj eqt howew u pam s A o wo ne ale sa6essaru pawuS 6o da d a cm AljSnsn aqu o S s 000 md e pa6ue43 I l uaueumd JO pawuw6o d aq Aluo US sa6Sssau1 wa sKs satkssaw wa sAs uwe khda d _ Z 0 s a xaeLp e qe em aq q6no tj da so OGu ssaid uaq pue c Gu sseJd Kq as we s a 3e elp le aeds u Mo oJ I P ZE ped e p S uope...

Page 777: ... overwriting any of the existing preprogrammed messages To do this simply call up one of the messages as explained previously When the cursor appears to the right of the message shift it to the left margin and write your new message over the preprogrammed one The new message will remain on your station until canceled It will than be erased and the original preprogrammed message will be restored No...

Page 778: ... in this chapter for more information The erased Name Number information should be gone To Enter Name Number Information for Other Stations Devices 1 Turn off Soft Keys by pressing MODE 7 0 when your telephone is idle 2 Press a DN 621 Entering Name Number information for other stations or devices is only allowed from Station 200 Currant information for station 200 will appear on the lower line of ...

Page 779: ...200 Press if your telephone is not equipped with an SDS button NN or NNN Speed Dial Code 10 49 from any station or 60 99 or 600 699 depending on your particular system size from station 200 only 3 Press MODE If a name was previously stored on this code it will display on the top line of the LCD Enter the name or memo refer to Recording a Message for method Press MODE Enter the desired telephone nu...

Page 780: ... MODE 0 40 To Set a Called Station Message 1 Press MODE 7 0 to snsure that Soft Kevs are off 2 Dial the station Directory Number station does not answer or is busy 3 Press MODE 4 Press 5 Enter the desired message number 6 Press MW FL 7 Press SPKR or hang up to release Message Sending The Alphanumeric Messaging feature on your LCD digital telephone enables you to set short text up to 32 characters ...

Page 781: ...plays MODE NO At originating station the LCD displays date day time and then displays SENT NNNM At the destination station the LCD displays the originating station number and a message indication To Set a Calling Station Message for Another Station 1 Press MODE when your telephone is idle 2 press 9 5 3 Dial the destination PDN 4 Press PAGE 5 Enter the desired message number 6 Press PAGE 7 Press MO...

Page 782: ...U l 58 January 1996 ...

Page 783: ......

Page 784: ......

Page 785: ......

Page 786: ......

Page 787: ......

Page 788: ......

Page 789: ......

Page 790: ......

Page 791: ......

Page 792: ......

Page 793: ......

Page 794: ......

Page 795: ......

Page 796: ......

Page 797: ......

Page 798: ......

Page 799: ......

Page 800: ......

Page 801: ......

Page 802: ......

Page 803: ......

Page 804: ......

Page 805: ......

Page 806: ......

Page 807: ......

Page 808: ......

Page 809: ......

Page 810: ......

Page 811: ......

Page 812: ......

Page 813: ......

Page 814: ......

Page 815: ......

Page 816: ......

Page 817: ......

Page 818: ......

Page 819: ......

Page 820: ......

Page 821: ......

Page 822: ......

Page 823: ......

Page 824: ......

Page 825: ......

Page 826: ......

Page 827: ......

Page 828: ......

Page 829: ......

Page 830: ......

Page 831: ......

Page 832: ......

Page 833: ......

Page 834: ......

Page 835: ......

Page 836: ......

Page 837: ......

Page 838: ......

Page 839: ......

Page 840: ......

Page 841: ......

Page 842: ......

Page 843: ......

Page 844: ......

Page 845: ......

Page 846: ......

Page 847: ......

Page 848: ......

Page 849: ......

Page 850: ......

Page 851: ......

Page 852: ......

Page 853: ......

Page 854: ......

Page 855: ......

Page 856: ......

Page 857: ......

Page 858: ......

Page 859: ...one companies CLID or CND Calling Line Identification or Calling Number Delivery Telephone number or name of the calling party is sent to the DK280 over incoming ground or loop start CO lines This feature is one CLASS feature offered by some local telephone companies CO Central Office The facility which houses switching equipment that provides telephone service CO lines E M tie lines DID lines Cen...

Page 860: ...sociated with electronic telephones DN Directory Number DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service Telephone number of called party is sent to the DK280 over incoming DID or tie lines This feature is provided by some long distance telephone companies HESB External Speaker Box A speaker amplifier that can be configured with the system to provide a variety of functions such as a paging speaker and or...

Page 861: ...rinters and computers which are in turn connected to PDIU DSs The PDIU DI is also used to provide personal computer auto dialing of voice calls without a modem and access to outside dial up data services and or bulletin boards via modem pooling Note PDIUDl2 is replaced with RPCI DI PDIU DS Stand alone Data Interface Unit Used for modem pooling printer sharing and accessing host mainframe computer ...

Page 862: ...can be easily revised in programming RATU Attendant Console Interface Unit Optional printed circuit board PCB that can support up to four attendant consoles and or PC attendant consoles RBDB Battery Distribution Box Interface used to connect reserve power batteries to systems with three or more cabinets also provides six RBTCl A 1 5M cables to connect RBDB to cabinet RPSU280 power supplies RBTCIA ...

Page 863: ...it can be switched to a second mode automatically and used with a Telephone Application Program Interface TAPI software application ROM Read Only Memory Refers to the type of system memory that holds static software that comprises the mechanics of the features functions ROM is only revised by Toshiba software engineers RPSB 1 and 2 Power Strip Interface between cabinet power supplies and the comme...

Page 864: ...iting generator switching circuit to operate standard telephone message waiting lamps RWBFI Wall bracket Fixture Bracket that is part of an installation kit RFIF that is used to floor mount systems RFMF Floor Mount Fixture Fixture that is part of an installation kit RFIF that is used to floor mount systems R48S Optional 48V Power Supply Subassembly that can be connected to the RSTU or RDSU to exte...

Page 865: ...requirements 6 28 ANI digit format 9 14 line routing assignments 10 104 tie line assignment 10 104 10 117 receive line option 9 14 announcementdevice block diagram 6 64 area code toll restriction 9 46 assign CO line groups 9 12 10 37 assigning DP DTMFtenant service to individual CO attendant console 1 1 1 3 1 131 15 1 23 1 24 1 lines 10 35 36 1 44 1 45 4 1 4 3 4 55 4 57 4 59 5 20 5 21 7 1 7 2 7 39...

Page 866: ... and tie line ring transfer recall time 10 67 ring tone over handsevheadsetoption 5 10 catastrophic faults 12 8 central office line see CO line characteristics electricaVenvironmental 2 3 class 1 5 toll restriction 9 46 class 6 8 toll restriction 9 47 clearance requirements 2 1 CO line and tie line ring transfer camp on recall time beep tone LED 12 9 7 calls 5 21 6 30 9 6 9 11 9 12 9 22 9 25 9 10 ...

Page 867: ...DU 4 44 direct station selection DSS 5 14 directory number assignments 9 4 10 75 10 76 hunting 10 59 DISA IMDU RMDS 10 145 display dialed number timing 9 7 distributed hunt group 6 37 9 23 9 26 9 27 9 29 DID extension number translations 10 29 directory numbers 10 20 member assignments 10 81 10 82 9 26 group ringing assignments 10 149 10 151 9 32 9 36 9 38 10 20 10 29 10 54 10 81 10 82 10 149 10 1...

Page 868: ...9 12 9 19 9 30 four circuit CO line interface unit PCOU 4 36 loop start CO line interface unit RCOU 4 32 frame ground test 3 28 front view of cabinet interiors 3 15 F fault classification 11 17 11 19 12 1 12 7 FCC registration numbers 7 2 fixed call forward 6 37 9 25 10 65 13 25 flash timing 9 10 flexible access code numbering 9 4 10 21 10 22 button assignment 10 72 10 74 10 79 codes 10 72 10 93 1...

Page 869: ...hedule assignments 9 48 9 52 10 1 97 1 0 special codes 9 47 9 49 10 188 station group assignments 9 48 10 206 10 207 toll restrictionbypass 9 44 10 174 10 175 toll restrictiondial plan 10 168 202 least cost routing see LCR line resize guardtime 9 6 LDI plan number 9 50 10 189 left side view of cabinet interior 3 13 level pad assignments 9 27 10 85 10 86 line PCBs 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 23 1 24 1 44 1 45 4 ...

Page 870: ... 34 9 36 10 144 PCB 1 2 4 1 4 2 6 12 7 2 PlOU and PIOUS 4 48 optional subassembly PCBs 1 2 outlet strip RPSBI and RPSB2 installation 3 32 overflow timer 9 29 owner telephone assignment 10 60 10 61 P padded tone return 9 6 page and BGM using the same amplifier park recall timing 9 26 pause timing 9 10 PBWCentrex access codes 9 40 10 164 PC attendant console 5 20 PCB installation 4 1 4 3 PIOU PIOUS ...

Page 871: ...59 4 61 4 62 5 17 6 3 6 5 6 8 6 9 6 11 6 12 6 14 6 15 6 19 6 22 6 26 6 28 6 32 6 33 6 36 6 61 6 62 6 67 6 70 7 2 7 22 7 23 7 42 9 34 9 37 10 11 10 141 11 1 11 13 13 2 13 6 alarm sensor block diagram 6 61 BGM 6 24 controls indicators and interfaceconnectors door lock relay options 6 9 hardware options 4 50 installationof multiple 6 67 installation procedures 4 50 interface PCB options 1 8 multiple ...

Page 872: ...36 9 5 9 8 9 10 9 13 9 19 9 24 9 26 9 40 10 30 11 7 10 2 4 23 4 26 4 52 4 53 4 55 6 8 6 23 6 28 6 36 6 37 6 70 9 6 9 7 9 10 9 12 9 14 9 18 9 22 9 24 10 31 1 10 3 4 26 4 57 6 28 6 37 6 65 6 70 12 4 7 6 32 9 10 9 11 10 33 13 6 37 6 70 9 11 10 34 13 11 13 25 15 4 35 4 42 4 44 4 48 5 20 6 65 8 3 9 6 9 11 9 12 9 34 10 35 11 7 9 8 9 10 9 17 10 32 16 4 35 4 44 4 48 9 12 9 47 9 49 9 52 17 4 40 4 42 4 45 4...

Page 873: ... 10 1 45 10 150 11 8 13 2 13 4 78 4 35 4 4a 4 52 4 55 6 14 6 63 9 35 9 37 79 5 17 9 37 10 146 80 9 38 10 148 81 89 4 49 5 21 9 26 9 38 10 149 10 1 51 90 4 7 8 1 8 12 9 1 9 2 10 2 13 16 13 19 91 1 91 2 9 2 10 4 91 9 8 10 9 1 10 1 10 11 92 8 13 9 2 10 5 10 1 1 93 4 36 4 42 4 46 9 7 9 39 10 156 10 157 8 11 9 2 10 3 10 11 97 9 39 10 158 programming data entry overview 8 2 variations 8 2 tutorials 8 1 ...

Page 874: ...ion 11 8 hardware options 4 48 installationprocedures 4 48 loop backjumper plugs 11 8 loop back testing 11 11 performancemonitor printout 11 14 RDTU 4 46 4 47 primary secondary reference block diagram printed circuit board 11 8 programming overview 4 48 requiredcables connectors 11 4 self test 11 1 11 11 slot assignments 11 3 4 61 T1 applications programming 11 3 11 4 T1 error record 11 15 T1 inst...

Page 875: ...ta dump example 6 32 data output options 10 97 faults 12 13 hardware requirements 6 32 outputlaccount code digit length 10 98 9 30 printer call accounting device installation 6 33 printout examples 6 29 6 31 software check 8 1 8 13 8 14 9 2 10 6 13 16 13 special common carrier SPCC 9 43 10 171 special ringing assignments 9 37 10 145 SSTU subunit and PSTU 4 25 standard telephone interface unit RSTU...

Page 876: ...1 9 33 9 39 9 48 10 80 10 1 03 10 159 10 166 10 168 10 170 10 172 10 184 11 8 13 12 allowed 9 44 9 45 10 176 10 179 after answer 9 25 class 9 31 9 44 9 45 10 166 10 180 10 181 class 1 8 10 166 10 181 classification 9 46 10 183 10 184 disable 9 43 10 169 10 170 exception office codes 10 182 override by system speed dial 9 39 parameters 10 180 9 45 simple 9 39 three six digit 9 39 9 45 traveling cla...

Page 877: ...I ...

Page 878: ...I ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for Strata AirLink DK280

Reviews:

Related manuals for Strata AirLink DK280

Brands by name

Popular brands

Toshiba Strata AirLink DK280, Installation Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for Strata AirLink DK280

Reviews:

Related manuals for Strata AirLink DK280

Brands by name

Popular brands